Netopia Router
ReferenceGuide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Chapter 1 — Introduction.......................................................... 1-1
How to use this guide .................................................... 1-2
Netopia models.................................................... 1-3
Connecting to the Advanced Configuration screens ........... 1-4
Connecting a modem to the SmartPort ................... 1-4
G
B
Navigating through the Advanced Configuration
screens ........................................................................ 1-6
Keyboard navigation .............................................. 1-7
Chapter 2 — Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections....... 2-1
ISDN WAN Setup ........................................................... 2-2
ISDN line configuration ......................................... 2-2
Leased line WAN Setup .................................................. 2-5
Leased line configuration ...................................... 2-6
Connection profiles for ISDN and Leased lines ............... 2-13
Frame Relay configuration ................................... 2-31
Frame Relay DLCI configuration ........................... 2-34
Default profile.............................................................. 2-39
How the default profile works
for a switched circuit .......................................... 2-40
How the default profile works
for a permanent circuit ....................................... 2-45
Call acceptance scenarios .................................. 2-47
WAN IP Address Serving............................................... 2-48
Scheduled connections ................................................ 2-49
CSU Backup ................................................................ 2-55
Chapter 3 — Connecting Your Local Network .............................. 3-1
Overview........................................................................ 3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Reference Guide
Readying computers on your local network....................... 3-2
Connecting to a LocalTalk network—
for 400 series models .................................................... 3-3
Connecting to an Ethernet network.................................. 3-4
EtherWave ........................................................... 3-5
10Base-T............................................................. 3-7
Thick and Thin Ethernet ........................................ 3-8
Chapter 4 — IP Setup ............................................................... 4-1
Key Features of IP Network Address Translation ...... 4-1
Using NAT ..................................................................... 4-2
Associating port numbers with nodes .............................. 4-4
NAT guidelines ..................................................... 4-5
IP setup ........................................................................ 4-6
Static routes ...................................................... 4-11
IP address serving....................................................... 4-16
MacIP (Kip Forwarding) Options ........................... 4-22
Chapter 5 — IPX Setup .............................................................. 5-1
IPX Definitions ............................................................... 5-1
IPX setup............................................................. 5-4
IPX in the answer profile ....................................... 5-7
IPX filters ...................................................................... 5-8
IPX packet filters ................................................ 5-10
IPX packet filter sets .......................................... 5-11
IPX SAP filters .................................................... 5-14
IPX SAP filter sets .............................................. 5-16
IPX routing tables ........................................................ 5-19
Chapter 6 — AppleTalk Setup ..................................................... 6-1
AppleTalk networks ........................................................ 6-1
MacIP.................................................................. 6-4
AURP................................................................... 6-4
Routers and seeding ............................................ 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
v
AppleTalk Setup for Small Office models.......................... 6-7
AppleTalk Setup for Corporate models ............................. 6-9
EtherTalk Setup.................................................... 6-9
LocalTalk Setup.................................................. 6-11
AURP setup ....................................................... 6-12
Chapter 7 — Security................................................................ 7-1
Suggested security measures ......................................... 7-2
User accounts ............................................................... 7-2
Telnet access ................................................................ 7-5
About filters and filter set ............................................... 7-6
What’s a filter and what’s a filter set?.................... 7-6
How filter sets work.............................................. 7-6
How individual filters work..................................... 7-9
Design guidelines ............................................... 7-15
Working with IP filters and filter sets .............................. 7-16
Adding a filter set ............................................... 7-17
Viewing filter sets ............................................... 7-23
Modifying filter sets ............................................ 7-24
Deleting a filter set............................................. 7-24
A sample IP filter set .......................................... 7-25
G
Chapter 8 — Token Security Authentication ................................ 8-1
Securing network environments ...................................... 8-1
Using the SecurID token card ......................................... 8-2
Personal identification number (PIN) ...................... 8-2
Key Security Authentication Features of the Netopia
Router................................................................. 8-2
Security authentication components ................................ 8-3
Configuring the Netopia Router
for security authentication .............................................. 8-4
Initiating a connection call using
security authentication ................................................... 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Reference Guide
Establishing a dial-on-demand (DOD)
connection call..................................................... 8-5
Establishing a manual connection call ................... 8-8
Troubleshooting............................................................. 8-9
Chapter 9 — Monitoring Tools ................................................... 9-1
Status overview............................................................. 9-1
General Status ..................................................... 9-2
Current Status ..................................................... 9-3
LED Status .......................................................... 9-4
Statistics ...................................................................... 9-5
Event Histories .............................................................. 9-9
Routing Tables ............................................................. 9-12
Call Accouting.............................................................. 9-15
SNMP ......................................................................... 9-17
sysObjectID and sysDescr................................... 9-18
The SNMP Setup screen ..................................... 9-19
SNMP traps ....................................................... 9-20
Chapter 10 — Utilities and Tests .............................................. 10-1
Setting the system date and time ................................. 10-2
Ping............................................................................ 10-3
Tracing a route ............................................................ 10-7
Upgrading the Netopia Router....................................... 10-8
Restarting the system.................................................. 10-8
Factory defaults ........................................................... 10-9
The ISDN loopback test................................................ 10-9
Console configuration................................................. 10-11
Transferring configuration and firmware files
with XMODEM............................................................ 10-12
Using the console port ..................................... 10-12
Using the SmartPort......................................... 10-13
Updating firmware ............................................ 10-14
Downloading configuration files ......................... 10-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
vii
Uploading configuration files ............................. 10-16
Transferring configuration and firmware files
with TFTP .................................................................. 10-17
Updating firmware ............................................ 10-18
Downloading configuration files ......................... 10-19
Uploading configuration files ............................. 10-20
Appendix A — Troubleshooting .................................................. A-1
Power outages ..................................................... A-1
Configuration problems ......................................... A-1
Console connection problems ............................... A-2
ISDN problems..................................................... A-2
Frame Relay problems .......................................... A-4
Network problems ................................................ A-5
Internal termination switch ............................................. A-6
Technical support .......................................................... A-7
How to reach us ................................................... A-8
G
Appendix B — Understanding IP Addressing ............................... B-1
What is IP?.................................................................... B-1
About IP addressing ....................................................... B-2
Subnets and subnet masks .................................. B-3
Example: Using subnets on a Class C IP internet.... B-5
Example: Working with a Class C subnet................ B-8
Distributing IP addresses ............................................... B-9
Manually distributing IP addresses ...................... B-10
Using address serving........................................ B-10
Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses .......... B-10
Nested IP subnets ....................................................... B-13
Broadcasts.................................................................. B-16
Packet header types ........................................... B-16
Appendix C — ISDN Configuration Guide .................................... C-1
Definitions ..................................................................... C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
viii
Reference Guide
About SPIDs .................................................................. C-2
Example SPIDs .................................................... C-3
Second directory number ............................................... C-3
Switch-specific uses ............................................. D-3
Backup number.................................................... D-4
Dynamic B-channel usage ............................................... D-4
Other incoming call restrictions ............................. D-5
Appendix D — ISDN, DDS/ ADN, and T1 Events ........................... D-1
Leased line events ......................................................... D-2
ISDN events .................................................................. D-2
ISDN event cause codes ....................................... D-3
Appendix E — Further Reading .................................................. E-1
Glossary
Index
Warranty
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Your Netopia Router offers Advanced Configuration features in
addition to the Easy Setup features. The advanced feature screens
are accessed through the Main Menu of the Router’s console
configuration screen. This Reference Guide documents the advanced
features, including advanced testing, security, monitoring, and
configuration features. This Reference Guide should be used as a
companion to the Easy Setup configuration instructions in the Netopia
Router Getting Started guide. You should read the Getting Started
guide before reading this Reference Guide.
This chapter introduces the Reference Guide and tells you how to use
it efficiently. You will also learn about different methods of accessing
the configuration screens. Finally, you will learn how to locate and go
to particular configuration screens.
P
o
w
e r
G o
T r a f f i c
T r a f f i c
P C c a r d
G o
B2
D
T r a f f i c
Ready
B1
ISDN
A U I
C
o
l l i s i o
n
T r a n s m i t
L i n k
R
e c e i v
e
L i n k
R
e c e i v
e
T
E
N
R
E
H
T
E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
Reference Guide
How to use this guide
available.
You can also use this summary to locate relevant sections:
■
page 2-2.
■
■
■
■
■
Setup” on page 2-5.
ISDN and Leased lines” on page 2-13.
“Default profile” on page 2-39.
“Restarting the system” on page 10-8.
profile, see “Establishing a WAN Connection” on page 2-30.
400 Netopia series
models only
■
■
■
■
“AURP setup” on page 6-12.
To configure dynamic IP address service (DHCP, MacIP, or
BOOTP), see “IP address serving” on page 4-16.
For testing network connections, see “The ISDN loopback test”
on page 10-9 to test a switched ISDN line, and “Ping” on
page 10-3 to test connections to IP hosts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1-3
■
■
For IP filters, see “About filters and filter sets” on page 7-6 and
“Working with IP filters and filter sets” on page 7-16.
configuration and firmware files with XMODEM” on page 10-12 or
“Transferring configuration and firmware files with TFTP” on
page 10-17.
■
To secure your network with SecurID, see Chapter 8, “Token
Security Authentication.”
Use the guide’s table of contents and index to locate sections on
other topics.
The appendices of this guide offer helpful information, such as
troubleshooting tips and a technical support guide.
Netopia models
This Reference Guide covers all of the Netopia Router models.
However some information in this guide will only apply to a specific
model.
See the Netopia Router’s Release Notes for more information, or call
Farallon Customer Service.
Screen differences
Because different Netopia Router models offer different features and
interfaces, the options shown on some screens in this Reference
Guide may not appear on your own particular Netopia Router’s
console screen.
These differences are explained throughout the manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
Reference Guide
Connecting to the Advanced Configuration screens
There are three ways to connect to the Netopia Router’s advanced
configuration screens:
■
■
■
Started Guide)
Using Telnet with the Router’s Ethernet port IP address (cannot
be used for initial configuration)
Over analog phone lines using a modem and terminal emulation
software (see “Connecting a modem to the SmartPort,” below)
You can also retrieve the Netopia Router’s configuration information
and remotely set its parameters using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (see “SNMP” on page 9-17).
Note: Web-based management does not support advanced
configuration.
Connecting a modem to the SmartPort
The Netopia Router has a SmartPort (also known as a PC Card port or
has two Type II slots and is located on the router’s left side behind a
pull-down cover.
You may want to attach a Farallon approved PC Card modem to the
Netopia Router to remotely configure it or to upgrade its firmware (see
“Updating firmware” on page 10-14 or page 10-18.) Contact Farallon
Customer Service for information on Farallon approved PC Card
modems.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1-5
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions when unpacking and preparing
to use the PC Card modem. One end of the telephone cable connects
to your modem, while the other end (RJ-11) connects to an analog
telephone line wall socket (not an ISDN or leased line).
SmartPort
PC Card
(PCMCIA)
To attach the modem to the Netopia Router, pull down the rubber door
that covers its SmartPort slots and insert the modem. You can use
either slot.
Inserting a PC Card (PCMCIA) modem into the exposed SmartPort slot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
Reference Guide
Navigating through the Advanced Configuration screens
To help you find your way to particular screens, some sections in this
guide begin with a graphical path guide similar to the following
example:
• ISDN Line Config.
• Connection Profiles
• Answer Profile
WAN
Setup
Advanced
Config.
Main
Menu
This particular path guide shows how to get to the WAN Setup
screens. The path guide represents these steps:
1. Beginning in the Main Menu, select the Advanced Configuration
item and press Return.
2. Select the WAN Setup item in the Advanced Configuration screen
and press Return.
3. Select the ISDN Line Configuration, Connection Profiles, or
Answer Profile item in the WAN Setup screen and press Return.
To go back in this sequence of screens, use the Escape key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1-7
Keyboard navigation
Use your keyboard to navigate the Netopia Router’s configuration
screens, enter and edit information, and make choices. The following
table lists the navigation keys.
To...
Use These Keys...
Move through selectable items in a
screen or pop-up menu
Up, Down, Left, and
Right Arrow
Execute action of a selected item or
open a pop-up menu of options for a
selected item
Return or Enter
Change a toggle value
(Yes/ No, On/ Off)
Tab
Esc
Restore an entry or toggle value to
its previous value
Move one item up
Ctrl + k
Ctrl + j
^E
Move one item down
Dump the device event log
Dump the ISDN event log
Refresh the screen
^F
^L
Go to topmost selectable item
Go to bottom right selectable item
<
>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1
Chapter 2
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
make and receive network connections over an ISDN or leased line
and how to control those connections. Topics include:
■
■
“Leased line WAN Setup” on page 2-5 shows you how to
outgoing calls.
■
page 2-13, shows you how to configure connection profiles for
your ISDN, SA/ Serial, DDS, or T1 Netopia Router.
■
■
set up an answer profile for incoming calls.
“WAN IP Address Serving,” beginning on page 2-48, discusses
from an address pool.
■
■
“Scheduled connections,” beginning on page 2-49, shows you
how to control the dates and times when connection profiles
can be used.
“CSU Backup,” beginning on page 2-55, describes how to
automatically switch from an internal CSU to the SA port during
a leased line failure.
Note: Netopia Router models offering different feature sets will
have variations in the fields on certain screens. For example, there
are switched (dial-up) or permanent (nailed-up) circuit ISDN or
leased line models, as well as models that offer feature subsets
such as AppleTalk, SmartIP (Network Address Translation and WAN
IP Address Serving) and SmartPhone (Plain Old Telephone Service).
Your own Advanced Configuration screens may look different from
those illustrated in this chapter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Reference Guide
ISDN WAN Setup
• Line Configuration
• Connection Profiles
• Default Answer Profile
Advanced
Configuration
Main
Menu
WAN
Setup
The ISDN WAN Setup screen has three subscreens, each involving a
different aspect of using the ISDN line to control connections to
remote IP or IPX networks.
Note: If you have completed Easy Setup (see the Getting Started
Guide), the information you have already entered will appear in
some of the Advanced Configuration screens.
To go to the WAN Setup screen, select WAN Setup in the Advanced
Configuration screen and press Return. A screen similar to the
following appears:
WAN Setup
Line Configuration...
Connection Profiles...
Default Answer Profile...
From here you will configure yours and the remote sites' WAN information.
ISDN line configuration
Enter the information provided by your telephone service provider in
the ISDN Line Configuration screen. Use the information recorded in
the Getting Started Guide’s ISDN worksheet as a reference when
specifying this configuration information.
To go to the ISDN Line Configuration screen, select Line
Configuration in the WAN Setup screen. Press Return, and the ISDN
Line Configuration screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-3
Note: If your ISDN Line Configuration screen contains items that
are not discussed in this section, such as SPIDs, see Appendix C,
“ISDN Configuration Guide.”
The ISDN Line Configuration screen consists of up to three pop-up
menus and up to four editable fields.
North America ISDN
models only
ISDN Line Configuration
Circuit Type...
Switch Type...
Switched
National ISDN-1 (NI-1)
SPID 1:
SPID 2:
510.238.4166.1
510.238.4167.2
Directory Number 1:
Directory Number 2:
510.577.4166
510.238.4167
Data Link Encapsulation...
PPP
Return/Enter goes to new screen.
Enter information supplied to you by your ISDN phone company.
1. Select Circuit Type and press Return. From the pop-up menu,
highlight Switched if you have an ISDN switched line, or
Permanent if you have a dedicated or leased ISDN line. Press
Return.
If you select Switched, go to step 3. If you select Permanent, go
to step 2.
Note: The Switch Type, SPIDs, and Directory Numbers apply
only to Switched ISDN service. If you select Permanent, these
fields are not displayed.
2. If you select Permanent as your circuit type, select B-Channel
Usage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Reference Guide
ISDN Line Configuration
Circuit Type...
Permanent
B-Channel Usage...
B1
Data Link Encapsulation...
PPP
Enter information supplied to you by your ISDN phone company.
From the pop-up menu, select the appropriate B-channel, such
as B1, B2, or Both. Then go to step 7.
Note: A permanent ISDN circuit type only supports 64 kbps
and 128 kbps B-channel usages.
3. Select Switch Type and press Return. From the pop-up menu,
select the switch protocol your ISDN service provider uses.
Observe these guidelines:
■
NI-1 can appear on an AT&T 5ESS or a Northern Telecom
DMS-100 Switch. Do not confuse it with a custom ISDN
implementation, which also appears on these two
switches.
Outside North America
models only
■
Countries not shown in the list may use the generic
EuroISDN protocol.
North America models
only
4. Select SPID 1 and enter the primary SPID number. If you did
not receive a SPID (AT&T 5ESS custom point-to-point switches
have no SPID), you should skip this and the following step.
North America models
only
5. If you have a second SPID, select SPID 2 and enter the
secondary SPID number.
Note: SPID1 and SPID2 are not displayed for models outside
North America.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-5
6. Select Directory Number 1 and enter the primary directory
number as you would dial it, including any required prefixes
(such as area, access, and long-distance dialing codes). Press
Return.
Note: If you select an IDSL (Pt-to-Pt) switch, the Directory
Number 1 field will default to 555-1234.
Since an IDSL line is already physically hooked up in a pt-to-pt
configuration, a specific directory number is not necessary.
However, the Netopia Router does require a directory number in
this field to allow a connection to dial out.
7. If you have a second directory number, select Directory
Number 2 and enter the secondary directory number as you
would dial it, including any required prefixes (such as area,
access, and long-distance dialing codes). Press Return.
8. Select Data Link Encapsulation and highlight the method of
encapsulation that you want to use from the pop-up menu. The
choices offered are PPP or HDLC. Press Return.
In order for the changes that you have entered in the ISDN Line
Configuration screen to take effect, you must reset the Netopia
Router. Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu. Select
Statistics, Utilities, Tests and then select Restart System.
Leased line WAN Setup
• Line Configuration
Advanced
Configuration
Main
Menu
WAN
Setup
• Frame Relay Configuration
• Frame Relay DLCI Configuration
• Connection Profiles
• Default Profile
The leased line WAN Setup screen will vary for an SA/ Serial, 56k
DDS, or T1 line depending on the circuit type and datalink
encapsulation parameter that is selected for that specific leased
line.
To begin WAN Setup, select WAN Setup in the Advanced
Configuration menu, then press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Reference Guide
WAN Setup
Line Configuration...
Frame Relay Configuration...
Frame Relay DLCI Configuration...
Connection Profiles...
Default Profile...
From here you will configure yours and the remote sites' WAN
information.
Note: For all leased line Netopia Router models using PPP or Cisco-
HDLC datalink encapsulation, the Frame Relay Configuration and
Frame Relay DLCI Configuration options will be hidden.
For all leased line Netopia Router models using Cisco-HDLC datalink
encapsulation, the Default Profile option will remain hidden.
If you have completed Easy Setup (see the Getting Started Guide),
the information you have already entered will appear in some of the
WAN Setup screens.
Leased line configuration
The following Leased line configuration section describes the first
step in configuring the Line Configuration screen in the WAN Setup
menu for an SA/ Serial, T1, and DDS Netopia Router wanlet module
enabled.
The Serial Line Configuration screen appears for SA/ Serial leased
line models (with an external CSU/ DSU connection). See below.
The T1 Line Configuration screen appears for T1 leased line models
(with an internal CSU/ DSU connection). See page 2-9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-7
The DDS Line Configuration screen appears for DDS leased line
models (with an internal CSU/ DSU connection). See page 2-12.
Line configuration for an SA/Serial line
The Serial Line Configuration screen is where you enter the
configuration parameters for your leased line, in order for the
Netopia Router to communicate with the physical connection. Use
the information in the Leased Line worksheet in the Getting Started
Guide, as a reference when specifying this configuration
information.
Permanent circuit only
Serial Line Configuration
Circuit Type...
Permanent Sync
64
Data Rate (kbps)...
Invert Tx Clock:
No
Circuit Activation Requires...
DCD and DSR
Data Link Encapsulation...
Frame Relay
Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company.
1. Select Circuit Type and select Permanent Sync or Switched
Async. If you select permanent sync, continue with Step 2. If
you select Switched Async, skip to Step 6.
2. Select Data Rate (kbps) and press Return. From the pop-up
menu, select a fixed data rate for your digital line or select
Auto. (The data rates to choose from range from 56 kbps to the
highest synchronized line speed.) The Auto setting allows your
Netopia Router to determine the data rate of your serial line at
the time of circuit activation. Press Return.
Permanent circuit only
3. Select Invert Tx Clock and toggle to Yes or No depending on
whether you use this selection. Press Return.
Invert Tx Clock causes transmitted data to be delayed by half a
clock phase. This option is useful for X.21 DTEs (Data Terminal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Reference Guide
Equipment) because their transmit data can become altered in
relation to the clock sourced by the DCE (Data Communications
Equipment).
A DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) is a term used to define the
equipment rate. It is a designation for the maximum rate at
which a router can exchange information.
A DCE (Data Communications Equipment) is a term defined by
both Frame Relay and X.25 committees, that applies to
switching equipment and is distinguished from the devices that
attach to the network (DTE).
Permanent circuit only
4. Select Circuit Activation Requires and select DCD-only,
DSR-only, or DCD and DSR. Press Return.
Some V.35 interfaces represent their capability to transfer user
data end-to-end with the DCD signal, while others offer a more
accurate representation with DSR. For this latter case, you may
choose to use DSR-only.
Note: This option will be hidden if an X.21 cable is attached.
5. Select Data Link Encapsulation and highlight the method of
encapsulation that you want to use from the pop-up menu. The
choices offered are PPP, HDLC, and Frame Relay. The default
setting is Frame Relay. Press Return.
Continue to the last step.
Switched circuit only
Serial Line Configuration
Circuit Type...
Switched Async
57.6
Data Rate (kbps)...
Modem Initialization String:
Modem Dialing Prefix:
AT&C1&D2E0S0=1
ATDT
Data Link Encapsulation is
Async PPP
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-9
Switched async only
6. Select Date Rate (kbps) and press Return. From the pop-up
menu, select 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2, or 230.4. Choose the
data rate that is about twice your modem’s capabilities. For
instance, if you have a 28.8K modem, select 57.6 for your data
rate. Press Return.
7. The Modem Initialization String and Modem Dialing Prefix
fields configure the connection to the external modem. For
Router 3.2 Release Note.
8. The Data Link Encapsulation is set to Async PPP.
9. You are now finished configuring the Serial Line Configuration
screen. Press the Escape key to return to the WAN Setup
screen. Go to page 2-13 for information on how to configure
your leased line connection profile.
Line configuration for a T1 line
The T1 Line Configuration screen is where you enter the
configuration parameters for your leased line, in order for the
Netopia Router to communicate with the physical connection. Use
the information in the Leased Line worksheet in the Getting Started
Guide as a reference when specifying your T1 configuration
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Reference Guide
T1 Line Configuration
B8ZS
Line Encoding...
Framing Mode...
ESF
No
Transmit ANSI PRMs:
Number of DS0 Channels:
First DS0 Channel:
1
1
Buildout (-dB)...
Auto
Channel Data Rate...
Clock Source...
Nx64k
Network
Data Link Encapsulation...
Frame Relay
Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company.
1. Select Line Encoding and press Return. From the pop-up menu,
highlight the encoding your telephone service provider uses:
B8ZS or AMI. The default setting is B8ZS. Press Return.
2. Select Framing Mode and press Return. From the pop-up
menu, highlight either ESF or D4, depending on the framing
mode that your telephone service provider advises you to use.
The default setting is ESF. Press Return.
3. The ANSI T1.403 standard defines Performance Report
Messages (PRMs) that may be transmitted each second from a
T1 Integrated CSU to the telephone service provider’s network.
By default, the Netopia Router does not send PRMs. However,
you can enable these transmissions by toggling Transmit ANSI
PRMs to Yes.
4. Select Number of DS0 Channels and enter the number of DS0
channels that you and your telephone service provider have
determined are necessary for your T1 line. The default setting
for DS0 Channels is 1 (one). Press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-11
Note: Each DS0 channel represents a 56k or 64k increment in
bandwidth. Selecting a number less than the maximum of 24
specifies a fractional-T1 interface.
For fractional-T1, you may also specify in the check box whether
the DS0 channels are contiguous or alternating.
5. Select First DS0 Channel and enter the number of the first
active DS0 channel you will be using. The default setting is 1
(one). Press Return.
Note: You may change the First DS0 Channel number, which
has a valid range from one to the maximum number minus the
number of active channels. If the number of active DS0
channels is 24 (maximum), First DS0 Channel is hidden.
6. Select Buildout (-dB) and press Return. From the pop-up menu,
highlight the line Buildout, which is the transmit attenuation of
your line that you will be using. The choices in the menu include
Auto, 0-0.6, 7.5, 15.0, 22.5, and None. The default setting is
Automatic. Press Return.
If Automatic is chosen, the attenuation of the transmission will
be set to match the receiving signal level.
7. Select Channel Data Rate and highlight the data rate specified
by your service provider. The channel data rate choices are
Nx56k or Nx64k. The default is Nx64k. Press Return.
8. Select Clock Source and press Return. From the pop-up menu,
highlight the clock source, that you wish to use. The choices
offered are Internal Clock Source, or Network Clock Source.
The default is Network. Press Return.
encapsulation that you want to use from the pop-up menu. The
choices offered are PPP, HDLC, and Frame Relay. The default
setting is Frame Relay. Press Return.
10. You are now done configuring the Line Configuration screen.
Press the escape key to return to the WAN Setup screen. Go to
page 2-13, for information on how to configure your leased line
connection profile.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Reference Guide
Line configuration for a DDS line
The DDS Line Configuration screen is where you enter the
configuration parameters for your leased line, in order for the
Netopia Router to communicate with the physical connection. Use
the information in the Leased Line worksheet in the Getting Started
Guide as a reference when specifying your DDS line configuration
information.
DDS Line Configuration
Circuit Type...
Permanent
Auto
Data Rate...
Clock Source...
Network
Data Link Encapsulation...
Frame Relay
Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company.
1. Select Circuit Type and press Return. From the pop-up menu,
highlight Switched for a dial-up digital line or Permanent for a
nailed-up leased line. The default setting is Permanent. Press
Return.
Note: The DDS data rate is capable of handling 56 or 64 kbps.
If the Switched circuit type is selected, 56 kbps data rate is the
only available option. If the Permanent circuit type is selected,
56 kbps and 64 kbps data rates will be available.
2. Select Data Rate and press Return. From the pop-up menu,
highlight the data rate that you want your DDS line connection
to transmit at. The data rate choices are 56 kbps and 64 kbps.
The default is Automatic. Press Return.
Note: As noted above, DDS Netopia Routers may run 56 kbps
or 64 kbps data rates on permanent circuits. You may
alternately select Automatic, in which case the router will hunt
between modes until it can determine what the telephone
company has provisioned your DDS line for.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-13
3. Select Clock Source and press Return. From the pop-up menu,
highlight the clock source, that you wish to use. The choices
offered are Internal Clock Source, or Network Clock Source.
The default is Network. Press Return.
encapsulation that you want to use from the pop-up menu. The
choices offered are PPP, HDLC, and Frame Relay. The default
setting is Frame Relay. Press Return.
5. You are now done configuring the Line Configuration screen.
Press the escape key to return to the WAN Setup screen. Go to
page 2-13, for information on how to configure your leased line
connection profile.
Connection profiles for ISDN and Leased lines
A connection profile is a set of parameters that tells the Netopia
Router how to connect to a remote destination. Connection profiles
are also used to make out-bound calls and optionally to help answer
calls.
Some Netopia models support up to 4 different connection profiles
while most models support up to 16 connection profiles.
To go to the Connection Profiles screen, select Connection Profiles
in the WAN Setup screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Reference Guide
Connection Profiles
Display/Change Connection Profile...
Add Connection Profile...
Delete Connection Profile...
Establish WAN Connection...
Disconnect WAN Connection...
Return/Enter to modify an existing Connection Profile.
This Screen is the main point of navigation for Connection Profiles.
Note: The Establish WAN Connection and Disconnect WAN
Connection fields in the Connection Profiles screen will only appear
for a Netopia Router model with switched circuit selected. This field
will remain hidden when permanent circuit is selected.
Displaying connection profiles
To display a view-only table of connection profiles, select
Display/ Change Connection Profile in the Connection Profiles
screen. Press Return and the connection profiles that you have
created will appear.
The Connection Profiles table is a handy way to quickly see the
names and destination IP or IPX addresses of your connection
profiles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-15
Connection Profiles
+-Profile Name---------------------IP Address----IPX Network-+
+------------------------------------------------------------+
| Easy Setup Profile
| Panost Inc.
127.0.0.2
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0
|
|
|
| XYZ Corporation
+------------------------------------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
Changing a Connection Profile
To modify a connection profile, select Display/ Change Connection
connection profiles.
Select a connection profile from the table and press Return to go to
the Change Connection Profile screen. The parameters in this
screen are the same as the parameters found in the Add
Connection Profile screen. To find out how to set them, see “Adding
a connection profile” on page 2-16.
Change Connection Profile
Profile Name:
Panost Inc.
Yes
Profile Enabled:
IP Enabled:
Yes
Yes
PPP
IP Profile Parameters...
IPX Enabled:
IPX Profile Parameters..
Data Link Encapsulation...
Data Link Options...
Telco Options...
Modify Connection Profile here. Changes are immediate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Reference Guide
Deleting a Connection Profile
To delete a connection profile, select Delete Connection Profile in
the Connection Profiles screen and press Return to display a table
of connection profiles.
Connection Profiles
+-Profile Name---------------------IP Address----IPX Network-+
+------------------------------------------------------------+
| Gunther Hydroelectric
127.0.0.2
0
|
+------------------------------------------------------------+
+------------------------------------------------------------+
| Are you sure you want to delete this Connection Profile?
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+------------------------------------------------------------+
1. Highlight the connection profile you wish to delete. Press
Return.
2. A connection profile table appears with a prompt asking you if
you want to delete the connection profile you have just
highlighted. Select CONTINUE if you wish to delete this
connection profile or CANCEL if you do not.
Adding a Connection Profile
To add a new connection profile, select Add Connection Profile in
the Connection Profiles screen. Press Return and the Add
Connection Profile screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-17
Add Connection Profile
Profile Name:
Profile 04
Yes
Profile Enabled:
IP Enabled:
Yes
IP Profile Parameters...
IPX Enabled:
Yes
IPX Profile Parameters..
Data Link Encapsulation...
Data Link Options...
PPP
Interface Group...
Telco Options...
Int CSU
ADD PROFILE NOW
CANCEL
Configure a new Conn. Profile. Finished? ADD or CANCEL to exit.
1. Select Profile Name and enter a name for this connection
profile. It can be any name you wish. For example: the name of
your ISP.
2. Select Profile Enabled and toggle it to Yes to activate the
profile.
3. Select IP Enabled and toggle it to Yes or No depending on
whether you will be using TCP/ IP over your WAN connection.
4. Select IP Profile Parameters. This option is only available if IP
Enabled is toggled to Yes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Reference Guide
IP Profile Parameters
Address Translation Enabled:
Yes
IP Addressing...
Local WAN IP Address:
Local WAN IP Mask:
Remote IP Address:
Remote IP Mask:
Numbered
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Filter Set...
Remove Filter Set
Receive RIP:
Yes
Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here.
Applicable only to SmartIP
models
5. In the IP Profile Parameters screen, toggle Address Translation
Enabled to Yes if you choose to use Network Address
Translation.
Network Address Translation allows communication between
the LAN connected to the Netopia Router and the Internet using
a single IP address, instead of a routed account with separate
IP addresses for each computer on the network. Network
Address Translation also provides increased security by hiding
the local IP addresses of the LAN connected to the Netopia
Router from the outside world.
Note: See “Summary of the Netopia Router models and
features” on page 1-5 of the Getting Started Guide.
■
■
If you did not enable Network Address Translation, select IP
Addressing and, from the pop-up menu, choose the IP routing
method that your ISP or network administrator specifies (either
Numbered or Unnumbered).
If your ISP uses Numbered (Interface-based) Routing, select
Local WAN IP Address and enter the local WAN address your
ISP gave you. Then select Local WAN IP Mask and enter the
WAN subnet mask of the remote site you will connect to.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-19
The default address for the Local WAN IP Address is 0.0.0.0,
which allows for dynamic addressing, when your ISP assigns an
address each time you connect. However, you may enter
another address if you want to use static addressing.
Note: When using Cisco-HDLC datalink encapsulation and
Network Address Translation, you must use a static address.
When using numbered interfaces, the Netopia Router will use
its local WAN IP address and subnet mask to send packets to
the remote router. Both routers have WAN IP addresses and
subnet masks associated with the connection.
IP Profile Parameters
Address Translation Enabled:
IP Addressing...
No
Unnumbered
Remote IP Address:
Remote IP Mask:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Filter Set...
Remove Filter Set
Receive RIP:
Transmit RIP:
No
No
Configure IP requirements for a remote network connection here.
■
If your ISP uses Unnumbered (System-based) Routing, select
Remote IP Address and enter the IP address your ISP gave you.
Then select Remote IP Mask and enter the IP subnet mask of
the remote site you will connect to.
Note: If your ISP has not given you their IP or subnet mask
addresses, then you may enter an IP address such as
127.0.0.2 and an IP subnet mask such as 255.0.0.0.
When using unnumbered interfaces, the Netopia Router will
use either its local Ethernet IP address or its NAT (Network
Address Translation) address (if so configured) and subnet
mask to send packets to the remote router. Neither router has
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Reference Guide
a WAN IP address or subnet mask associated with this
connection. These default addresses will request that the
remote router dynamically assign an address at the time the
connection is made.
To configure a profile for a terminal adapter or Netopia Router
that is dialing into your router using dynamic Network Address
Translation, you may enter a 0.0.0.0 remote IP address and
enable IP WAN Address Serving.
Note: If you are interested in serving a WAN IP Address to an
incoming caller, see “WAN IP Address Serving” on page 2-48.
■
■
Select Filter Set and then select an appropriate filter set from
the list. If you do not want to block any TCP/ IP traffic, then
leave this entry blank.
To remove a filter set, select Remove Filter Set and press
Return. A pop-up menu will appear displaying the filter sets you
have set up previously. Highlight the specific filter set that you
want to remove and press Return. A window will appear asking
you if you are sure that you want to delete that specific filter
set. You can either select Continue or Cancel.
■
■
Select Receive RIP and toggle it to Yes if you want the Netopia
Router to receive RIP information sent by remote routers that
are connected to your local area network (LAN).
Select Transmit RIP and toggle to Yes if you want the Netopia
Router to send RIP information to remote routers that are
connected to your LAN. If Transmit RIP has been enabled, the
TX RIP Policy field will appear. Select TX RIP Policy and press
Return and the Poison Reverse field will appear.
■
Press the Escape key when you are finished configuring IP
Profile Parameters to go back to the Add Connection Profile
screen. The next step describe how to configure the IPX
parameters. If you do not wish to enable IPX, skip to step 7,
which describes how to set up Data Link Encapsulation.
6. From the Add Connection Profile screen, select IPX Enabled
and toggle it to Yes or No depending on whether you will be
using IPX over your ISDN connection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-21
Note: Using the IPX protocol is required with other remote
networks using IPX for an intranet connection. For more
information on IPX, refer to Chapter 5, “IPX Setup” of this
guide.
■
Select IPX Profile Parameters and press Return. This option is
only available if IPX Enabled is toggled to Yes.
IPX Profile Parameters
Remote IPX Network:
Path Delay:
00000000
10
NetBios Packet Forwarding:
Off
Incoming Packet Filter Set...
Outgoing Packet Filter Set...
<<NONE>>
<<NONE>>
Incoming SAP Filter Set...
Outgoing SAP Filter Set...
<<NONE>>
<<NONE>>
Periodic RIP Timer:
Periodic SAP Timer:
60
60
Configure IPX requirements for a remote network connection here.
■
Select Remote IPX Network and enter the network address of
the IPX network being called. Do not use an address already in
use by another connection profile. If this value is set to zero
and the Netopia Router is answering a call, the remote address
will be learned when the profile is active.
Note: If you are trying to connect two Netopia Routers using
Frame Relay and IPX, be sure to enter an IPX address for the
remote side in the connection profiles. If the remote IPX
address is all zeros (the default), the two Netopia Routers will
not be able to connect.
Note: Unlike IP, the IPX network address is never used in
matching a profile when answering a non-authenticated call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
Reference Guide
■
■
■
To change the default Path Delay, select and enter a value (in
ticks).
To enable NetBIOS Packet Forwarding, toggle the selection to
Yes.
Select Incoming Packet Filter Set to attach a filter set for
filtering incoming packets. Choose a filter set from the list and
press Return.
■
■
■
Select Outgoing Packet Filter Set to attach a filter set for
filtering outgoing packets. Choose a filter set from the list and
press Return.
Select Incoming SAP Filter Set to attach a filter set for filtering
server entries within incoming Service Advertising Protocol
(SAP) packets. Choose a filter set from the list press Return.
Select Outgoing SAP Filter Set to attach a filter set for filtering
server entries within outgoing Service Advertising Protocol
(SAP) packets and choose a filter set from the list.
■
■
■
Select Periodic RIP Timer, and enter a new value (in seconds)
to change the periodic RIP timer’s default value.
Select Periodic SAP Timer, and enter a new value (in seconds)
to change the periodic SAP timer’s default value.
Press the Escape key to go back to the Add Connection Profile
screen when you are finished configuring IPX Profile
Parameters.
For more information on creating an IPX filter set, go back to the
Advanced Configuration screen and select the Filter Sets (Firewalls)
screen. Also refer to Chapter 6, “IPX Setup”.
7. Select Data Link Encapsulation and highlight the method of
encapsulation that you want to use from the pop-up menu. The
choices offered are PPP, HDLC, or Frame Relay. Press Return.
If you have enabled PPP/ MP, go to step 8. If you have enabled
Frame Relay, go to step 9. If you have enabled HDLC, go to step
11.
8. Select Data Link Options and press Return. The PPP/ MP
Options screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-23
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol
(MP) allow the Netopia Router to make adaptable and secure
connections to other networks.
PPP/MP Options
Data Compression...
Ascend LZS
PAP
Send Authentication...
Send User Name:
Send Password:
Receive User Name:
Receive Password:
B-Channel Usage...
BAP Usage...
Dynamic
Off
Return/Enter to choose PPP Authentication type (or None).
■
Select the Data Compression pop-up menu, choose the type of
data compression supported by the network you are calling,
and press Return. The choices are Ascend LZS, Standard LZS,
or None (if the remote network does not use Ascend LZS or
Standard LZS). Ascend LZS is compatible with the type used by
Ascend Communications. This is the default setting for Data
Compression, as most ISP’s (Internet Service Providers) and
remote networks use Ascend’s proprietary data compression
utility. Standard LZS is an IETF (Internet Engineering Task
Force) standard for LZS data compression.
Applicable only to
Switched circuits
■
Select the Send Authentication pop-up menu and choose the
type of connection security supported by the network you are
calling. From the pop-up menu highlight PAP, CHAP,
PAP-TOKEN, CACHE-TOKEN, or None (if the remote network
does not use PAP or CHAP). On the Netopia Router the default
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
Reference Guide
authentication is set for PAP, as this is usually the most popular
security parameter that ISP’s and other remote networks set up
for a point-to-point connection use.
■
If you choose None, and the remote network expects to
connect to the Netopia Router using this connection pro-
file, you may need to set the answer profile to accept calls
using no authentication (None). See “Default profile” on
page 2-39.
■
If you choose to use PAP for calling the remote network,
you will need to obtain a name and password from the
remote network’s administrator. Enter the name in Send
User Name and enter the password in Send Password. If
you want the remote network to use this connection profile
when it calls the Netopia Router, select Receive Name and
word. You will need to give this name and password to the
remote network’s administrator.
If you choose PAP, and the remote network expects to connect
to the Netopia Router using this connection profile, you may
need to set the answer profile to accept calls using PAP. See
“Default profile” on page 2-39.
■
If you choose to use CHAP for calling the remote network,
obtain a name and secret (the CHAP term for password)
from the remote network’s administrator. Enter the name
in Send Host Name and enter the password in Send
Secret. If you want the remote network to use this connec-
tion profile when it calls the Netopia Router, select Receive
Host Name and enter a name. Select Receive Secret and
enter a secret. You will need to give this name and secret
to the remote network’s administrator.
Note: If you choose CHAP, and the remote network expects to
connect to the Netopia Router using this connection profile, you
may need to set the answer profile to accept calls using CHAP.
See “Default profile” on page 2-39.
■
If you choose to use PAP-TOKEN, select Send User Name
and enter a name for your Netopia Router. You will not
need to enter a Send Password for PAP-TOKEN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-25
■
If you choose to use CACHE-TOKEN, select Send User
Name and enter a name for your Netopia Router. Then,
select Send Password and enter a secret name or number.
If you will be using SecurID (an added method of security
authentication), check with your network administrator to find
out if you will need to use either PAP-TOKEN, or
CACHE-TOKEN. (Also, see Chapter 9, “Security-Token
Authentication”.)
PPP/MP Options
Data Compression...
Ascend LZS
PAP
Send Authentication...
Send User Name:
Send Password:
Receive User Name:
Receive Password:
+-------------------+
+-------------------+
B-Channel Usage...
BAP Usage...
| Dynamic
|
|
|
| 1 B-Channel
| 2 B-Channels
| 2 B, Preemptable |
+-------------------+
Maximum Packet Size:
Applicable only to
Switched circuits
■
Select B-Channel Usage and choose how this connection
profile will use the ISDN line’s B-channels. From the pop-up
menu highlight either Dynamic, 1 B-Channel, 2 B-Channels, or
2 B, Pre-emptable.
■
Dynamic (default setting), allows the connection profile to
use one or both channels at any time during a call. The
decision to alternately use or drop the second B-channel is
based on an algorithm that looks at traffic volume over
time. With Dynamic, one B-channel may be relinquished to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Reference Guide
accept an incoming call through or when a second connec-
tion profile is used to make a call. See Appendix D for infor-
mation on “Dynamic B-channel usage”.
■
1 B-Channel forces a call to remain within one B-channel.
(Throughput will generally be at either 56k or 64k, depend-
ing on how the local telephone company installs your ISDN
line. This will also depend on certain geographic locations
in North America. The standard ISDN data rate outside of
North America is 64k.)
■
■
2 B-Channels forces a call to use both B-channels.
(Throughput connection will generally run at 128k.)
2 B Pre-emptable allows calls to use 2 B-channels in a
dynamic, Pre-emptable manner. This option is very similar
to Dynamic, in that the second B-channel may be relin-
quished to accept an incoming call or to initiate a second
outgoing call. However, 2B Pre-emptable will always try to
add a second B-channel to the call when the second chan-
nel is otherwise unused, much like a fixed 2 B-channel
selection.
Note: If you select Dynamic or 2 B, Pre-emptable while using
PPP/ MP, the Netopia Router may attempt to use both
B-channels during a call. However, during a call, your second
B-channel may be blocked from use if the answering side drops
that B-channel before you begin sending data over it. The
Netopia Router will try four times to bring up the second
B-Channel; if all attempts fail and you wish to retry, end the call
and reinitiate it.
Applicable only to
Switched circuits
■
Select BAP Usage and from the pop-up menu highlight the
method of BAP usage that your ISP or network administrator
has suggested that you use when establishing a connection to
a remote site. The choices offered for BAP usage are On - Old
IDs, On - New IDs, and Off. Press Return.
BAP refers to the PPP Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol.
The BAP Usage feature allows a Netopia Router to either dial
out to provide a telephone number for a multilink call, or allows
the Netopia Router to answer a call, while also providing a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-27
telephone number for a multilink call. In addition, the Netopia
Router can bring WAN links up and down with a remote router.
Note: There are two specifications for BAP protocol. The first
specification was proposed before January 1997 and the latter
was proposed after that date.
The On-Old IDs selection refers to the earlier BAP proposal and
On-New IDs refer to the new proposal.
Because there is no set standard at this time for BAP protocol
the Netopia Router allows you to select either specification.
Models with Frame Relay
enabled only
9. Select Data Link Options and press Return. The Frame Relay
Parameters screen appears.
Frame Relay Parameters
Auto-Detect DLCIs:
Yes
0
Multicast DLCI Number:
Configure Frame Relay-specific parameters of your Connection Profile
here.
■
select Yes, you are enabling your Frame Relay profile to
auto-detect the DLCIs associated with its network layer
attributes. This feature is also called SmartMatch. If you select
No, you will need to manually configure each DLCI in the DLCI
configuration table. See “Frame Relay DLCI configuration” on
page 2-34. The default setting for this option is Yes. Press
Return.
■
Select Multicast DLCI Number. In this field you may add a
number that will be used for multicasting in conjunction with the
network layer attributes of your given profile. The default setting
for this option is 0. If you choose to leave 0 as the value for this
field, the specific profile that you are configuring will not be
used for multicasting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
Reference Guide
T1 and DDS models only
10. The Interface Group field reflects the active port selection: the
internal CSU for T1 or DDS, or SA port for SA, if backup is
enabled. See “CSU Backup” on page 2-55 for more
information.
Models with Switched
circuits only
11. Select Telco Options and press Return. The Telco Options
screen appears. The Telco Options screen contains items that
allow you to control the calls made on the WAN line with this
particular connection profile.
Telco Options
Initiate Data Service...
Dial...
64 kb/sec
Dial In/Out
Number to Dial:
Alternate Number to Dial:
Dial On Demand:
Yes
300
Idle Timeout (seconds):
CNA Validation Number:
Callback:
No
In this Screen you configure options for the ways you will establish a
link.
ISDN Switched circuit
models only
■
Select Initiate Data Service and choose the correct ISDN
bandwidth to use with this connection profile. In North America,
users are not guaranteed of having a 64k connection to their
destination, but only when 64k is not available from point A to
point B should 56k be selected. The Router automatically falls
back to 56k when 64k service is not available. It is advised to
select 56k when you know that the 64k service will fail. You
may also select Speech if your line is provisioned for this
feature and the call is within your local ISDN region. Selecting
Speech may save money, but it is not guaranteed to work
outside of your switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-29
■
■
Select Dial and set this connection profile to only make calls,
only receive calls, or do both. Choose from In Only (receive
calls), Out Only (make calls), or Dial In/ Out (receive and make
calls).
Select Number to Dial and enter the telephone number you
received from your ISP. This is the number the Netopia Router
dials to reach your ISP. Enter the number as you would dial it,
including any required prefixes (such as area, access, and
long-distance dialing codes).
If you selected IDSL (Pt-to-Pt) as your Netopia Router’s switch
type the connection profile’s number to dial will default to
555-4321. The same default information applies to this
number as the directory number, in order for the Netopia Router
to allow a connection to dial out.
Note: If you previously selected Permanent as your router’s
Circuit Type in the ISDN Easy Setup screen, Number to Dial will
not be an available option.
■
■
Select Alternate Number to Dial if your ISP requires that you
use a second telephone number to dial, or as an alternative
backup when the first channel is unavailable to use.
Available for outbound
calls only
Select Dial On Demand and toggle No if manual connections
are required for this profile. The default for Dial On Demand is
Yes, which is correct for most uses. When Dial On Demand is
set to Yes, the Netopia Router can automatically make calls as
the need arises, such as when a request to connect to a host
Dial on demand also comes into action when IP and or IPX
traffic needs to go to a route defined by the profile attributes.
Every dial-on-demand profile becomes a part of the routing
table.
See “Establishing a WAN Connection” on page 2-30 for more
information.
■
Select Idle Timeout (seconds) and enter the time limit desired
before the Netopia Router drops a call if there is no activity on
the line. The default timeout setting is 300 seconds (5
minutes.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
Reference Guide
ISDN Switched circuit
models only
■
■
The CNA Validation Number is the telephone number that your
Netopia Router will match to incoming calls. Question marks
“?” can be used in place of numbers as wild card characters to
See “Default profile” on page 2-39 for information on CNA
(Calling Number Authentication).
Available for inbound calls
only
Available for inbound calls
only
Select Callback and toggle to Yes to drop incoming answered
calls and use this connection profile to call the remote network
back. (See “Default profile” on page 2-39 for information on
incoming calls matching connection profiles). The default for
Callback is No.
You are now finished configuring the Telco options screen.
Press the Escape key to return to the Add Connection Profile
screen.
12. From the Add Connection Profile screen, select ADD PROFILE
NOW to save the current connection profile information that you
have just entered, and press Return to go to the Connection
Profiles screen. Alternatively, you can cancel the connection
profile you have just constructed by selecting CANCEL to exit
the Add Connection Profile screen.
Establishing a WAN Connection
Switched circuit models
only
To establish a manual WAN connection call, select Establish WAN
Connection from the Connection Profiles screen and press Return.
The Establish WAN Connection pop-up menu displays a table of all
of the connection profiles you have previously defined. Highlight the
connection profile you wish to manually call. Press Return and the
connection you select will initiate a call.
Call Status
Profile Name -- Panost, Inc.
Connection State -- Acquiring
Hit ESCAPE/RETURN/ENTER to return to previous menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-31
If a connection is establishing properly, the Connection State will
initially read Acquiring but will change to Up once the call has
successfully connected. You will be able to access information at
the remote site that you are connecting to once authentication is
completed successfully.
Disconnecting a WAN Connection
Switched circuit models
only
To hang up a manual WAN connection call, select Disconnect WAN
Connection from the Connection Profiles screen and press Return.
The Disconnect pop-up menu displays a table of all of the
connection profiles you have previously defined. Highlight the
connection profile you wish to disconnect. Press Return and the
connection you select will be disconnected. Press Esc to cancel.
Frame Relay configuration
If you chose Frame Relay as your datalink encapsulation type you
will now need to configure your Netopia Router to support Frame
Relay. From the WAN Setup screen, select the Frame Relay
Configuration option and press Return.
The Frame Relay Configuration screen consists of two pop-up
menus. Use the information in the Leased Line worksheet in the
Getting Started Guide as a reference when specifying this
configuration information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-32
Reference Guide
Frame Relay Configuration
LMI Type...
ANSI (Annex D)
T391 (Polling Interval in secs):
N391 (Polls/Full Status Cycles):
N392 (Error Threshold):
10
6
3
N393 (Monitored Event Window):
4
Tx Injection Management...
Default CIR:
Standard
64000
64000
0
Default Bc:
Default Be:
Congestion Management Enabled:
Maximum Tx Frame Size:
Yes
1536
Enter Information supplied to you by your telephone company.
A), LMI, or None. The world-wide default is ANSI (Annex D).
Press Return.
Note: If you select None as an LMI Type, the four LMI options
listed below will remain hidden, and you will need to manually
configure DLCIs. See “Frame Relay DLCI configuration” on
page 2-34 for instructions.
Specifying the Link Management Type is the first step in
configuring Frame Relay.
■
If you select an LMI Type (Link Management Type) other than
None, the T391 option specifies the number of seconds
between the Status Enquiry messages. The default setting is
10.
■
The N391 option specifies the frequency of full status polls,
in increments of the basic (T391) polling cycle. The default
setting is 6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-33
■
■
The N392 option specifies the maximum number of (link
reliability, protocol, and sequence number) error events that
can occur within the N393 sliding window. If an N392 thresh-
old is exceeded, the switch declares the Netopia Router inac-
tive. The default setting is 3.
The N393 option allows the user to specify the width of the
sliding N392 monitored event window. The default setting is
4.
2. Select Tx Injection Management and press Return. From the
pop-up menu, highlight Standard if you want the frames on your
line that exceed the link capacity to be acknowledged and marked
as discard-eligible, Buffered if you want the frames on your line
that exceed the link capacity to be delayed until the link is less
busy, or None if you want all of the frames on your line to be
transmitted. Press Return.
Note: If you select None as the Tx Injection Management type,
the three Tx Injection Management options listed below will
remain hidden. Go to step 4.
If you select Standard or Buffered as the Tx Injection
Management type, then the Default CIR, Bc, and Be values will
appear (in the corresponding fields below the Tx Injection
Management field) in order for you to define the parameters the
management algorithm.
■
■
The Default CIR (CIR also referred to as Committed
Information Rate) represents the average capacity available
to a given PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) or DLCI (Data Link
Connection Identifier). This setting defaults to 64000, but
you may modify the capacity rate if this setting will not be
applicable to you.
The Default Bc (Bc also referred to as Committed Burst Size)
represents the maximum amount of data that your Frame
Relay service provider agrees to transfer from a given PVC
(Permanent Virtual Circuit) or DLCI (Data Link Connection
Identifier). This setting defaults to 64000, but you may
change the capacity rate if this setting needs to be modified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-34
Reference Guide
■
The Default Be (Be also referred to as Excess Burst Size)
represents the maximum amount of data that your Frame
Relay service provider will attempt to deliver to a given PVC
(Permanent Virtual Circuit) or DLCI (Data Link Connection
Identifier). This setting defaults to 0, but you may change the
capacity rate if this setting needs to be modified.
See Appendix B, “Understanding Frame Relay” in the Getting
Started Guide for information on the these parameters.
Note: Some Frame Relay service providers allow for
over-subscription of the DLCIs, which occurs when the total
number of CIRs for all PVCs exceeds the line rate setup.
3. Select Congestion Management Enabled and toggle to Yes or No
depending on whether you use this selection. Press Return.
If Congestion Management is enabled, this option causes the
Netopia Router to use in-bound FECNs (Forward Explicit
Congestion Notification). This feature is designed to notify you
that congestion avoidance procedures should be initiated where
applicable for traffic in the same direction as the received frame.
It indicates that the frame in question, has encountered
congested resources.
Note: The Congestion Management Enabled field will only appear
if Standard or Buffered is selected as the option from the Tx
Injection Management field.
4. Select Maximum Frame Size and press Return. The default is
automatically set to a value suitable for encapsulating a full
the Maximum Frame Size to suit your networks transmission load.
Press Return.
You are now done configuring the Frame Relay Configuration screen.
Press the Escape key to return to the WAN Setup screen. If you need
to configure your DLCIs, go to the section below. Otherwise, go to
“Connection Profiles for ISDN and Leased lines” on page 2-13 to set
up your connection profile for a remote site.
Frame Relay DLCI configuration
If you selected None as your LMI Type then you will need to manually
configure your DLCIs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-35
A Frame Relay DLCI is a set of parameters that tells the Netopia
Router how to initially connect to a remote destination.
The Netopia Router leased line models support up to 16 different
Frame Relay DLCI configuration profiles.
Each Frame Relay DLCI configuration you set up allows the Netopia
Router to connect your network to another network that uses IP or IPX
over Frame Relay.
To go to the Frame Relay DLCI configuration screen, select Frame
Relay DLCI Configuration in the WAN Setup screen.
Frame Relay DLCI Configuration
Display/Change DLCIs...
Add DLCI...
Delete DLCI...
Add, delete, and modify DLCIs from here.
Displaying a Frame Relay DLCI configuration table
To display a view-only table of the Frame Relay DLCIs, select
Display/ Change DLCIs in the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen,
and press Return.
The Frame Relay DLCI Configuration table is a handy way to quickly
view the DLCI names and DLCI numbers that you attribute to your
Frame Relay profiles.
Frame Relay DLCI Configuration
+-DLCI Name----------DLCI Number-+
+--------------------------------+
| DLCI 33
|
32 |
|
+--------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss, Return/Enter to Edit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-36
Reference Guide
Changing a Frame Relay DLCI configuration
To modify a Frame Relay DLCI configuration, select Display/ Change
DLCIs in the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen.
Select a DLCI Name from the table and press Return to go to the
Change DLCI screen. The parameters in this screen are the same as
the parameters in the Add DLCI screen. To find out how to set them,
see “Adding a Frame Relay DLCI configuration” on page 2-37.
Change DLCI
DLCI Name:
DLCI 33
Yes
DLCI Enabled:
DLCI Number (16-991):
Remote IP Address:
32
2.0.0.2
Here you configure the parameters for a single DLCI (Data Link Circuit ID).
Deleting a Frame Relay DLCI configuration
To delete a Frame Relay DLCI configuration, select Delete DLCI in the
Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen and press Return to display
the Frame Relay DLCI configuration table.
+----------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Are you sure you want to delete this DLCI?
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+----------------------------------------------------------------------+
1. Highlight the Frame Relay DLCI configuration you wish to delete.
Press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-37
just highlighted. Select CONTINUE if you wish to delete this DLCI
or CANCEL if you do not.
You are now done configuring the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration
screen. Press the escape key to return to the WAN Setup screen. Go
to “Connection profiles for ISDN and Leased lines,” beginning on
page 2-13, for information on how to configure your leased line
connection.
Adding a Frame Relay DLCI configuration
To add a new Frame Relay DLCI, select Add DLCI in the Frame Relay
DLCI Configuration screen. Press Return and the Add DLCI screen
appears.
Add DLCI
DLCI Name:
DLCI 17
Yes
DLCI Enabled:
DLCI Number (16-991):
Remote IP Address:
17
2.0.0.2
Data Flow Parameters---------------Use Default---------Value----
CIR:
Bc:
No
64000
64000
No
Be:
Yes
ADD DLCI NOW
CANCEL
Return accepts * Tab toggles * ESC cancels.
1. Select DLCI Name and enter a name for this individual Frame
Relay DLCI profile. It can be any name you wish. For example: the
name of your ISP or remote branch your connecting to such as
the corporate headquarters of your company.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-38
Reference Guide
Note: The Netopia Router allows Frame Relay DLCIs to be
named, so that you can easily reference and differentiate them.
This is accomplished by giving a DLCI Name to a DLCI Number.
Frame Relay DLCI Configuration
+-DLCI Name----------DLCI Number-+
+--------------------------------+
| Panost Inc.
| THARPER Inc.
|
16 |
32 |
|
+--------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to cancel, Return/Enter to Delete.
2. Select DLCI Enabled and toggle it to Yes to activate the profile. If
you disable this profile, the Netopia Router will automatically
disable and block access to a specific remote DLCI.
3. Select DLCI Number (16-991) and enter a number for this
individual DLCI. Check with your Frame Relay provider to find out
what numbers are allocated for each of your DLCI profiles. The
DLCI number range should fall within the range of 16-991. For
more information, refer to the Leased line worksheet that you
filled out in Chapter 2 of the Getting Started Guide.
4. Select Remote IP Address and enter the remote IP address your
ISP or network administrator gave you that represents the remote
sites IP address for their router. Press Return.
If you select Standard or Buffered as the Tx Injection Management
type in the Frame Relay Configuration screen go to the next bulleted
item below. If you selected None in the Frame Relay Configuration
screen go to step 6.
Below the Remote IP Address field, the following Data Flow
Parameters appear:
■
The CIR (Committed Information Rate) represents the aver-
age capacity available to a given PVC (Permanent Virtual Cir-
cuit) or DLCI (Data Link Connection Identifier). The setting
defaults to 64000, but you may modify the capacity rate by
toggling the selection in the Use Default field to No. You can
then enter a different capacity rate in the Value field.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-39
■
The Bc (Committed Burst Size) represents the maximum
amount of data that your Frame Relay service provider
agrees to transfer from a given PVC (Permanent Virtual Cir-
cuit) or DLCI (Data Link Connection Identifier). The setting
defaults to 64000, but you may modify the committed burst
size by toggling the selection in the Use Default field to No.
You can then enter a different committed burst size in the
Value field.
■
The Be (Excess Burst Size) represents the maximum amount
of data that your Frame Relay service provider will attempt to
deliver to a given PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) or DLCI
(Data Link Connection Identifier). The setting defaults to 0,
but you may modify the excess burst size by toggling the
selection in the Use Default field to No. You can then enter a
different excess burst size in the Value field.
Note: Some Frame Relay service providers allow for
over-subscription of the DLCIs, which occurs when the total
number of CIRs for all PVCs exceeds the line rate set up.
5. Select ADD DLCI NOW to save the current static Frame Relay
DLCI profile that you have just entered, and press Return to go
back to the Frame Relay DLCI Configuration screen. Alternately,
you can cancel the Frame Relay DLCI profile you have just created
by selecting CANCEL to exit the Add DLCI screen.
Default profile
Netopia can answer calls as well as initiate them over switched
circuits. To answer calls, Netopia uses a default profile. The default
and more.
For information on how to set up a default profile for a switched
circuit, see the next section.
For information on how to set up a default profile for a permanent
circuit, see “How the default profile works for a permanent circuit,”
beginning on page 2-45.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-40
Reference Guide
How the default profile works for a switched
circuit
The Default Profile works like a guard booth at the gate to your
network: it scrutinizes incoming calls. Like the guard booth, the
default profile allows calls based on a set of criteria that you define.
The main criterion used to check calls is whether they match one of
the connection profiles already defined. If PAP or CHAP authentication
is being used, the default profile checks that the incoming call’s name
and password/ secret match the receive name and password/ secret
of a connection profile. If PAP or CHAP is not being used, an incoming
call is matched to a connection profile using the remote network’s IP
address (that is, the caller is defined as the destination of a particular
connection profile).
If an incoming call is matched to an existing connection profile, the
call is accepted. All of that connection profile’s parameters, except for
authentication, are adopted for the call.
You could set up the default profile to allow calls in even if they fail to
match a connection profile. Continuing the guard booth analogy, this
would be like removing the guards or having them wave all calls in,
regardless of their source.
If an incoming call is not required to match a connection profile, and
fails to do so, it is accepted as a standard IP connection. Accepted,
unmatched calls adopt the call parameter values set in the default
profile.
To determine how which call parameter values unmatched calls will
adopt, customize the default profile parameters in the Default Profile
screen.
Customizing the default profile
You can customize the Netopia Router’s default profile in the Default
Profile screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-41
WAN Setup
Line Configuration...
Connection Profiles...
Default Answer Profile...
From here you will configure yours and the remote sites' WAN information.
1. Select Default Answer Profile in the WAN Setup screen. Press
Return. The Default Profile screen appears.
2. To enable CNA authentication, select Calling Number
Authentication in the Default Profile screen and choose one of
the following settings:
Ignored: Calling Number Authentication (CNA) is not in effect.
This is the default setting.
Preferred: Authentication is attempted if the calling number is
available. If authentication fails, or the calling number is not
available, the call proceeds as usual and the caller may still
connect successfully. Use this setting if you expect to receive
both regular and CNA-authenticated calls.
Required: Authentication is attempted if the calling number is
available. If authentication fails, or the calling number is not
available, the Netopia Router disconnects the caller. Use this
setting if you require all calls to be CNA-authenticated.
Calling Number Authentication (CNA), is an application of
CallerID. It is a method of verifying that an incoming call is
originating from an expected site. Using CNA, you can increase
the security of your network by requiring that callers not only
possess the correct PPP authentication information, but also are
calling from a particular physical location.
CNA works by matching the actual calling number to the number
entered in the Calling Number field in the answering side’s
connection profile. When a match occurs, the incoming call is
handled by the connection profile containing the matched
number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-42
Reference Guide
Note: If the actual calling number and entered calling number do
not have the same number of digits, CNA can still match the
numbers. The smaller number determines how many digits must
match. For instance, if the actual calling number is 10 digits and
the entered calling number is 7 digits, only 7 digits must be
matched. The 7 digits that must be matched in this example are
the last 7 digits of each calling number. In this example then, the
first 3 digits of the actual calling number will be ignored. This
method allows the actual calling number to include prefixes and
area codes without requiring the entered calling number to
include them.
Calling numbers can also be matched using the wildcard
character, ?, which will match any digit. For example, if you enter
555-123? in the Calling Number field, the following actual calling
numbers will be matched: 555-1231, 555-1232, 555-1233,
555-1234, 555-1235, 555-1236, 555-1237, 555-1238,
555-1239, and 555-1230.
Using CNA can also provide cost savings because calls are not
billed during the CNA phase. With CNA, a caller can set up a
connection to the Netopia Router without incurring any charges by
accessing a dial-back connection profile. If the caller’s rates are
higher than those charged to the Netopia Router’s return call,
then using CNA has saved the difference.
CNA should be available where CallerID services are available.
You will need to consult with your telephone service provider to
find out if your line is provisioned for CallerID.
Also note that if the calling side has instructed the phone
company to block delivery of its caller ID, the answering side will
not be able to authenticate.
North America models
only
If you have a Northern Telecom DMS-100 line (either Custom or
NI-1) you should verify that the line supports “Calling Number
Delivery" service.
If your line is an AT&T 5ESS (either custom or NI-1) verify that it
supports "CPN/ BN (Calling Party Number/ Billing Number)
Delivery" service.
If your line does not support the appropriate service, CNA may
not work properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-43
Note: For an ISDN switched circuit with HDLC datalink
encapsulation enabled, the Default Profile screen will only show
the Calling Number Authentication pop-up menu.
3. To force incoming calls to match connection profiles, select Must
Match a Defined Profile and toggle it to Yes. Incoming calls that
cannot be matched to a connection profile are dropped. To allow
unmatched calls to be accepted as standard IP or IPX
connections, toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to No.
If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to Yes, the answer profile
only accepts calls that use the same authentication method
defined in the Authentication item. If PAP or CHAP are involved,
the caller must have a name and password or secret that match
one of the connection profiles. The caller must obtain these from
you or your network administrator before initiating the call.
For example, if Must Match a Defined Profile is set to Yes, and
Authentication is set to PAP, then only incoming calls that use
PAP and match a connection profile will be accepted by the
answer profile.
If authentication in the default answer profile is set to CHAP, the
value of the CHAP Challenge Name item must be identical to the
value of the Send Host Name item of the connection profile to be
matched by the caller.
If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to No, Authentication is
assumed to be None, even if you’ve set it to PAP or CHAP. The
answer profile uses the caller’s IP address to match a connection
profile. However, the answer profile cannot discover a caller’s
subnet mask; it assumes that the caller is not subnetting its IP
address:
Class A addresses are assumed to have a mask of 255.0.0.0
Class B addresses are assumed to have a mask of 255.255.0.0
Class C addresses are assumed to have a mask of
255.255.255.0. Class C address ranges are generally the most
common subnet allocated.
If a remote network has a non-standard mask (that is, it uses
subnetting), the only way for it to successfully connect to the
Netopia Router is by matching a connection profile. In other
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-44
Reference Guide
words, you will have to set up a connection profile for that
network.
You can set the following default parameters for incoming calls:
■
Authentication
Non-North America
models only
■
■
■
Force 56K on Answer
Data Compression
Maximum Receive Packet Size
If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to No, you can also set the
following parameters for accepted calls that do not match a
connection profile:
■
■
B-Channel Usage
Idle Timeout
ISDN switched circuit
models with PPP
enabled only
■
BAP Usage
■
■
Firewall Filter Set
Tx RIP
Non-Small Office models
only
Non-Small Office models
only
■
■
■
■
■
Rx RIP
Net BIOS Packet Forwarding
Periodic RIP Timers
Periodic SAP Timers
All of these parameters are similar to the connection profile
parameters of the same names. To find out how to set them, see
“Adding a Connection Profile” on page 2-16.
Note: The only options that would be offered for ISDN profiles would
be applied to the Default Profile for ISDN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-45
How the default profile works for a permanent
circuit
The default profile works like a guard booth at the gate to your
network: it scrutinizes WAN connections. Like the guard booth, the
default profile allows connections based on a set of criteria that you
define.
The main criterion used to check connections is whether they match
one of the connection profiles already defined. A connection is
matched to a connection profile using the remote network’s IP
address (that is, the caller is defined as the destination of a particular
connection profile).
If a connection matches an existing profile, all of the connection
profile parameters are adopted for the call.
When using PPP or Cisco-HDLC datalink encapsulation on a
permanent circuit, you must configure a connection profile. Note, that
you may have already configured this connection profile in Easy Setup.
See the Getting Started Guide for information on configuring an Easy
Setup connection profile.
When using Frame Relay datalink encapsulation on a permanent
circuit, you may require that the frame relay DLCIs explicitly match up
to your connection profile, or you may allow your Frame Relay network
to automatically confirm this by using the Default Frame Profile.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-46
Reference Guide
Customizing the default profile
You can customize the Netopia Router’s default frame relay profile in
the Default Frame Profile screen.
WAN Setup
Line Configuration...
Frame Relay Configuration...
Frame Relay DLCI Configuration...
Connection Profiles...
Default Frame Profile...
Return/Enter for default WAN connection parameters.
1. Select Default Frame Profile in the WAN Setup screen. Press
Return. The Default Frame Profile screen appears.
Default Frame Profile
Must Match a Defined Profile:
No
IP Enabled:
Yes
IP Parameters...
IPX Enabled:
Yes
IPX Parameters...
Configure Default WAN Connection Parameters here.
2. To force matches with connection profiles, select Must Match a
Defined Profile and toggle to Yes. To allow the frame relay
network to automatically configure a frame profile, toggle to No.
If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to Yes, the fields in the
Default Profile screenshot above will remain hidden.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-47
If Must Match a Defined Profile is set to No, you can also set the
following parameters for accepted calls that do not match a
connection profile:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Network Address Translation
Interface-based Routing or System-based Routing
Firewall Filter Set
Transmit RIP
Receive RIP
TX RIP Policy to use either Split Horizon or Poison Reverse
Net BIOS Packet Forwarding
Net BIOS Path Delay
Periodic RIP Timers
Periodic SAP Timers
Call acceptance scenarios
The following are a few common call acceptance scenarios and
information on how to configure the router for those purposes.
■
To accept all calls, regardless of whether they match a
connection profile:
■
Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to No.
■
To only accept calls that match a connection profile through use
of a name and password (or secret):
■
■
Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to Yes, and
Set Authentication to PAP or CHAP.
Note: The authentication method you choose determines which
connection profiles are accessible to callers. For example, if you
choose PAP, callers using CHAP or no authentication will be
dropped by the answer profile.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-48
Reference Guide
■
■
To allow calls that only match a connection profile’s remote IP
and/ or IPX address:
■
■
Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to Yes, and
set Authentication to None.
To not allow any incoming calls to connect to the Netopia Router:
■
■
Toggle Must Match a Defined Profile to Yes, and
Set the Dial option in the Telco Options screen of every con-
nection profile to Dial Out Only
WAN IP Address Serving
IP Address
Serving
Advanced
Config.
Main
Menu
Small Office ISDN
models only
The Netopia Router supports WAN IP Address Serving.
With WAN IP Address Serving the Netopia Router serves an IP
address to an incoming call. The incoming caller can be either a TA
(Terminal Adapter), such as the Netopia ISDN Modem, or another
Netopia Router with the NAT (Network Address Translation) feature
set. The incoming caller will dynamically obtain an IP address from a
pool of IP addresses that the Netopia Router serves.
The Netopia Router serving the IP address should have a connection
profile with an IP address of 0.0.0.0 defined for the calling TA or
router.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-49
IP Address Serving
IP Address Serving:
On
To select WAN IP Address Serving, go to the IP Address Serving
screen from the Advanced Configuration menu and toggle On.
Note: WAN IP Address Serving is used for only incoming caller
connections. Refer to “IP address serving” on page 4-16, for more
information on how to use WAN IP Address Serving.
Scheduled connections
Scheduled
Connections
Advanced
Config.
Main
Menu
You can set a Netopia Router using a switched circuit to make
scheduled connections using designated connection profiles. This is
useful for creating and controlling regularly scheduled periods when
the router can be used by hosts on your network. It is also useful for
once-only connections that you want to schedule in advance.
To go to the Scheduled Connections screen, select Scheduled
Connections in the Advanced Configuration screen.
Scheduled Connections
Display/Change Scheduled Connection...
Add Scheduled Connection...
Delete Scheduled Connection...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-50
Reference Guide
Viewing scheduled connections
To display a table of view-only scheduled connections, select
Display/ Change Scheduled Connection in the Scheduled
Connections screen. Each scheduled connection occupies one row of
the table.
Scheduled Connections
+-Days----Begin At - HH:MM--- When-----Conn. Prof. NameEnabled ------+
| MTWTFSS 08:30PM
|
|
06:00
weekly
Profile 3
Forced
|
|
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
The first column in the table shows a one-letter representation of the
Days of the week, from Monday (M or m) to Sunday (S or s). If a letter
representing a day is capitalized, the connection will be activated on
that day; a lower-case letter means that the connection will not be
activated on that day. If the scheduled connection is configured for a
once-only connection, the word “once” will appear instead of the days
of the week.
The other columns show:
■
■
■
■
■
The time of day that the connection will Begin At
The duration of the connection (HH:MM)
Whether it’s a recurring Weekly connection or used Once Only
Which connection profile (Conn. Prof.) is used to connect
Whether the scheduled connection is currently Enabled
You should make sure that the Netopia Router’s system date and time
are correct (see “Setting the system date and time” on page 10-2).
The router checks the date and time set in scheduled connections
against the system date and time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-51
Adding a scheduled connection
To add a new scheduled connection, select Add Scheduled
Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen and go to the Add
Scheduled Connection screen.
Add Scheduled Connection
Scheduled Connection Enable:
How Often...
On
Weekly
Forced
Schedule Type...
Set Weekly Schedule...
Use Connection Profile...
ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION
CANCEL
Follow these steps to configure the new scheduled connection:
■
To activate the connection, select Scheduled Connection Enable
and toggle it to On. You can make the scheduled connection
inactive by toggling Scheduled Connection Enable to Off.
■
Decide how often the connection should take place by selecting
How Often and choosing Weekly or Once Only from the pop-up
menu. The item directly below How Often allows you to set the
exact weekly schedule or once-only schedule. If How Often is set
to Weekly, the item directly below How Often reads Set Weekly
Schedule. If How Often is set to Once Only, the item directly
below How Often reads Set Once-Only Schedule.
■
If you selected Weekly, select Schedule Type and select from the
pop-up menu.
Forced schedules the connection according to the parameters
you set in the next step.
Periodic retries the connection several times during the
scheduled time.
Demand-Allowed defines the schedule when demand calls are
enabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-52
Reference Guide
Demand-Blocked defines the schedule when demand calls are
prevented.
■
■
If you selected Weekly, select Set Weekly Schedule and go to
the Set Weekly Schedule screen.
Select the days for the scheduled connection to occur and toggle
them to Yes.
Set Weekly Schedule
Monday:
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Tuesday:
Wednesday:
Thursday:
Friday:
Saturday:
Sunday:
Scheduled Window Start Time:
AM or PM:
02:08
PM
Call Window Duration:
00:00
■
Select Scheduled Window Start Time and enter the time to
initiate the scheduled connection. Be sure to use the same clock,
either 12-hour or 24-hour, as the system time format in the Set
Date and Time screen. See “Setting the system date and time”
on page 10-2.
You must enter the time in the format H:M, where H is a one- or
two-digit number representing the hour and M is a one- or
two-digit number representing the minutes. The colon is
mandatory. For example, the entry 1:3 (or 1:03) would be
accepted as 3 minutes after one o’clock. The entry 7:0 (or 7:00)
would be accepted as seven o’clock, exactly. The entries 44, :5,
and 2: would be rejected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-53
■
■
Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM from the pop-up menu.
Select Scheduled Window Duration and enter the maximum
duration allowed for this scheduled window (not for the call).
■
If you selected Periodic, select Every and choose how often the
call should be attempted. The default is every 15 minutes.
You are done configuring the weekly options. Return to the Add
Scheduled Connection screen to continue.
■
If you set How Often to Once Only, select Set Once-Only
Schedule and go to the Set Once-Only Schedule screen.
Set Once-Only Schedule
Place Call on (DD/MM/YY):
02/11/1998
Scheduled Window Start Time:
AM or PM:
02:08
PM
Scheduled Window Duration:
00:00
■
■
Select Place Call On (DD/ MM/ YY) and enter a date in the
format DD/ MM/ YY (day, month, year).
Note: You must enter the date in the format specified. The
slashes are mandatory. For example, the entry 5/ 1/ 95 would be
accepted as January 5, 1995. The entry 1/ 6 would be rejected.
Select Schedueld Window Start Time and enter the time to
initiate the scheduled connection.
Note: You must enter the time in the format H:M, where H is a
one- or two-digit number representing the hour and M is a one- or
two-digit number representing the minutes. The colon is
mandatory. For example, the entry 1:3 (or 1:03) would be
accepted as 3 minutes after one o’clock. The entry 7:0 (or 7:00)
would be accepted as seven o’clock, exactly. The entries 44, :5,
and 2: would be rejected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-54
Reference Guide
■
■
Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM. The AM or PM item
appears only if the time is in the 12-hour clock format.
Select Scheduled Window Duration and enter the maximum
duration allowed for this scheduled window (not for the call). Use
the same format restrictions noted above.
You are done configuring the once-only options. Return to the Add
Scheduled Connection screen to continue.
■
■
In the Add Scheduled Connection screen, select Use Connection
Profile and choose from the list of connection profiles you have
already created. A scheduled connection must be associated with
a connection profile to be useful. The connection profile becomes
active during the times specified in the associated scheduled
connection, if any exists.
Select ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION to save the current
scheduled connection. Select CANCEL to exit the Add Scheduled
Connection screen without saving the new scheduled connection.
Modifying a scheduled connection
To modify a scheduled connection, select Display/ Change Scheduled
Select a scheduled connection from the table and go to the Change
Scheduled Connection screen. The parameters in this screen are the
same as the ones in the Add Scheduled Connection screen (except
that ADD SCHEDULED CONNECTION and CANCEL do not appear). To
find out how to set them, see “Adding a scheduled connection” on
page 2-51.
Deleting a scheduled connection
To delete a scheduled connection, select Delete Scheduled
Connection in the Scheduled Connections screen to display a table of
scheduled connections.
Select a scheduled connection from the table and press the Return
key to delete it. To exit the table without deleting the selected
scheduled connection, press the Escape key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring ISDN and Leased Line Connections
2-55
CSU Backup
Advanced
Configuration
Main
Menu
WAN
Setup
CSU Backup
Configuration
When you are using the leased line interfaces T1 and DDS, you can
configure an automatic CSU backup, to switch to the SA port during a
leased line failure.
CSU Backup Configuration
Enable SA Port as CSU Backup
Yes
Requires Data Link Failure of...
30 Sec
Circuit Type...
Switched Async
57.6
Data Rate (kbps)...
Modem Initialization String:
Modem Dialing Prefix:
AT&C1&D2E0S0=1
ATDT
Data Link Encapsulation is
Async PPP
In the CSU Backup Configuration Screen, follow these steps to enable
the SA port as the CSU backup.
2. Select Requires Data Link Failure of. From the pop-up menu,
select how long the failure must be to enable the backup. The
default is 30 seconds.
3. The remaining fields configure the SA port. See “Line
configuration for an SA/ Serial line” on page 2-7 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-56
Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1
Chapter 3
Connecting Your Local Network
In this chapter, you will learn how to physically connect the Netopia
Router to your local area network (LAN). Before you proceed, make
sure the Netopia Router is properly configured. You can configure
the Router using Console-based Management or Web-based
Management (see the Getting Started Guide).
Overview
You can connect the Netopia Router to an IP or IPX network that
uses Ethernet. You can connect to the Router’s Ethernet ports with
either a PC LAN using IP over Ethernet or Apple Macintosh
computers using native IP.
You can also connect the Router to an AppleTalk network that uses
either Ethernet or LocalTalk. AppleTalk networks based on Ethernet
cabling (EtherTalk) connect to all models of the Router through the
Ethernet port.
AppleTalk networks based on LocalTalk cabling connect to the 400
series models through the PhoneNET port. If you have both kinds of
AppleTalk networks, you can connect the LocalTalk network to the
network to the Ethernet ports. AppleTalk traffic will be routed
between these two networks.
Caution!
Before connecting the Netopia Router to any AppleTalk LANs that
contain other AppleTalk routers, you should read “Routers and
seeding” in “Routers and seeding” on page 6-5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Reference Guide
See the sections later in this chapter for details on how to connect
the Netopia Router to the two types of networks.
Readying computers on your local network
PC and Macintosh computers must have certain components
installed before they can communicate through the Netopia Router.
The following illustration shows the minimal requirements for a
typical PC or Macintosh computer.
Application software
TCP/ IP stack
Ethernet/ EtherTalk/ LocalTalk Driver
Your PC
or Macintosh
computer
To the Netopia Router
Application software: This is the software you use to send e-mail,
browse the World Wide Web, read newsgroups, etc. These
applications may require some configuration. Examples include the
Eudora Light e-mail client, and the web browsers Microsoft’s
Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator.
TCP/ IP stack: This is the software that lets your PC or Macintosh
communicate using Internet protocols. TCP/ IP stacks must be
configured with some of the same information you used to configure
the Netopia Router. There are a number of TCP/ IP stacks available
for PC computers. Windows 95 includes a built-in TCP/ IP stack.
Macintosh computers use either MacTCP or Open Transport.
Ethernet: Ethernet hardware and software drivers enable your PC or
Macintosh computer to communicate on the LAN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Your Local Network
3-3
EtherTalk and LocalTalk: These are AppleTalk protocols used over
Ethernet.
Once the Netopia Router is properly configured and connected to
your LAN, PC and Macintosh computers that have their required
components in place will be able to connect to the Internet or other
remote IP networks.
Connecting to a LocalTalk network—for 400 series models
Connect one end of the LocalTalk cable to the Netopia Router’s
PhoneNET port. Connect the other end of the cable to your LocalTalk
network.
If your LocalTalk network is not based on standard PhoneNET
cabling, use a PhoneNET-to-LocalTalk adaptor cable. Connect the
adaptor cable’s RJ-11 connector to the Netopia Router. Connect the
cable’s mini-DIN-3 connector to your LocalTalk network.
The PhoneNET port is terminated, so the Netopia Router should
only be used at the end of your LocalTalk network. Be sure to
observe the standard rules governing maximum cable lengths and
limits on the number of nodes on a PhoneNET network.
Note: Make sure you do not connect your LocalTalk network to the
Telco port, one of the EtherWave ports, or one of the POTS (Phone 1
and 2) ports.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
Reference Guide
Connecting to an Ethernet network
The Netopia Router supports an Ethernet connection to either its
AUI or its EtherWave ports. The Router’s autosensing feature
eliminates the need for a switch; connection to the AUI or
EtherWave ports is automatically detected and the connected port
is used.
You can connect several types of Ethernet networks to the Netopia
Router. Most are distinguished by the type of cable they use. The
table below displays some important attributes of four types of
Ethernet.
10Base-2
(thin)
10Base-5
(thick)
Attribute
EtherWave
10Base-T
Max. length of backbone,
branch, or end to end (cable
length)
330 feet
(100 meters)
330 feet
600 feet
1500 feet
(100 meters) (185 meters) (450 meters)
Twisted pair
(10Base-T)
Twisted pair Flexible (thin)
Coaxial
(thick)
Cable type
(10Base-T)
coaxial
Netopia Router port used
EtherWave
EtherWave
AUI
AUI
Maximum 8
devices (daisy
chained)
No daisy
chain
Requires
transceiver
Requires
transceiver
Other restrictions
Caution!
Do not connect to both the AUI and EtherWave ports. Connect to
either the AUI port or to the EtherWave ports. Connecting to both
the AUI and EtherWave ports will result in communications errors on
the networks connected to these ports.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Your Local Network
3-5
EtherWave
To add the Netopia Router to your EtherWave daisy chain, use a
10Base-T cable with RJ-45 connectors. The router can be connected
to your EtherWave network at any point in the daisy chain.
EtherWave
Macintosh
LaserWriter
PC
Macintosh
PC
PowerBook
Netopia
EtherWave
NuBus Card
EtherWave
Mac/PB
Adapter
EtherWave
ISA Card
EtherWave
AAUI Transceiver
EtherWave
Transceiver
EtherWave
Printer Adapter
The Netopia Router in the middle of an EtherWave daisy chain
EtherWave
Macintosh
LaserWriter
PC
Macintosh
PC
PowerBook
10Base-T
HUB
Netopia
EtherWave
NuBus Card
EtherWave
Mac/PB
Adapter
EtherWave
ISA Card
EtherWave
AAUI Transceiver
EtherWave
Transceiver
EtherWave
Printer Adapter
The Netopia Router in the middle of an EtherWave daisy chain that’s part of a
larger network
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Reference Guide
You may use either or both of the EtherWave ports to connect the
Netopia Router, as needed. No termination is necessary, even when
the router is at the end of your EtherWave network.
EtherWave
Netopia
EtherWave
The Netopia Router at the end of an EtherWave daisy chain
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting Your Local Network
3-7
10Base-T
You can connect a 10Base-T Ethernet network to the Netopia Router
either through one of its EtherWave ports or through its AUI port.
EtherWave
10Base-T
HUB
The Netopia Router in a 10Base-T network
To connect your 10Base-T network to the Netopia Router through its
EtherWave port, use a 10Base-T cable with RJ-45 connectors. You
may connect your 10Base-T network to either EtherWave port.
EtherWave
PC
Macintosh
PC
EtherWave
NuBus Card
EtherWave
ISA Card
EtherWave
Transceiver
EtherWave
Printer Adapter
10Base-T
HUB
When there are no more free ports on the 10Base-T hub, the network can be
extended using EtherWave.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
Reference Guide
Thick and Thin Ethernet
You can connect a 10Base-5 (Thick Ethernet) or 10Base-2 (Thin
Ethernet) network to the Netopia Router’s AUI port.
To connect your 10Base-5 network to the Netopia Router’s AUI port,
use a standard Ethernet 10Base-5 transceiver and cable.
To connect your 10Base-2 network to the Netopia Router’s AUI port,
use a standard Ethernet 10Base-2 transceiver and cable.
AUI
10Base-2
Connecting to a 10Base-2 network using Farallon’s EtherMac Transceiver
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1
Chapter 4
IP Setup
The Netopia Router uses Internet Protocol (IP) to communicate both
locally and with remote networks. This chapter shows you how to
configure the Router to effectively route IP traffic. You also learn
how to configure the Router to serve IP addresses to hosts on your
local network.
Some models of the Netopia Router support the SmartIP feature,
which includes Network Address Translation (NAT).
NAT is a powerful feature that allows the user to represent an entire
LAN to the outside world as a single IP address. Instead of having
an ISP assign a separate IP address for each computer on the
network, the ISP provides one public IP address called a proxy
address. Each computer then has a separate private IP address, but
uses the proxy address to communicate with the outside world.
Key Features of IP Network Address Translation
(NAT)
■
NAT is selectable on a per connection basis, optionally allowing
real addresses to be used for intranet connections and proxied
addresses to be used for Internet connections.
■
The NAT user can use any combination of proxied and
unproxied addresses simultaneously with ISDN on the two
B-channels. For instance, one unproxied address connection
profile can be used to connect to a central office, while another
proxied address connection profile can simultaneously connect
the user’s Netopia Router and LAN to the Internet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Reference Guide
■
■
The single proxy address is acquired at connection time from
the answering side. The address can be assigned by the
remote router from either a dynamic pool of addresses or a
fixed, static address.
Static NAT (Network Address Translation) Security is made
simpler and more reliable by only having to firewall one IP
address and by obscuring the internal network structure from
the Internet.
Using NAT
Follow these steps to use NAT.
1. Pick a network number for your local (internal) network. This
can be any IP address range you want. For this example, we will
use 10.0.0.0.
Note: The outside world (the external network) will not see this
network number.
2. Using the internal network number, assign addresses to the
local nodes on your LAN. For example, you may assign
■
■
■
■
■
10.0.0.1 to your Netopia Router
10.0.0.2 to a node running as a World Wide Web server
10.0.0.3 to an FTP server
10.0.0.4 to a Macintosh computer
10.0.0.5 to a Windows 95 PC
3. Create a connection profile for your ISP or other remote net-
work. See “Adding a Connection Profile” on page 2-16. In the IP
Profile Parameters screen, toggle Address Translation Enabled
to Yes, to turn on NAT for this profile.
4. When your Netopia Router calls the ISP, the remote router that
answers the call assigns your Netopia Router an IP address
that external users use to communicate with your network. To
view this address, go to the QuickView menu and check More
Info in the Current Status section of the profile.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-3
In the following example screen, 192.163.100.6 is assigned to
the calling Netopia Router.
Note: The QuickView screen varies by your Netopia Router
model and line type.
Quick View
Ethernet Address - 00-00-c5-ff-60-8d Current Date - 5/31/97 03:09:43PM
Firmware Version -- 3.0
IP Address - 163.176.8.128
AppleTalk ET Address - 33051:150
AppleTalk LT Address - 33050:149
IPX Network Address - 00000000
Current ISDN Connection Status
---Profile Name-------State--%Use---Remote Address--------Est.----More Info-----
ISP
B1
10
IP 192.163.4.1
Lcl NAT 192.163.100.6
LED Status
-----ETHERNET------+--CH1-----MGMT----CH2---+-CARD-+-PWR +-------LEDS--------
LNK LNK TX COL AUI
- -
RX LNK RDY TX RX LNK
- - - -
|'-'= Off 'E'= Error
-
-
-
E
-
-
O |'O' = On '*'= Blink
Internal users can access the Internet as they always do; the
external Internet, however, views all traffic that the computers
generate on the internal network as originating from
192.163.100.6. Similarly, all traffic received by your Netopia
Router on that network is addressed to 192.163.100.6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Reference Guide
Associating port numbers with nodes
When an IP client, such as a Netscape or Microsoft Internet Explorer
web browser, wants to establish a session with an IP server, such
as a web server, the client must know the IP address to use and the
IP port where the traffic is to be directed.
Just as an IP address specifies a particular computer on a network,
ports are addresses that specify a particular service in a computer.
There are many universally agreed-upon ports assigned to various
services. For example:
■
■
■
■
Web servers use port number 80.
FTP servers use port number 21.
Telnet uses port number 23.
SNMP uses port number 161.
The Netopia Router lets you associate these and other port
numbers with nodes on your internal LAN. See page 4-8 for details
on how to accomplish this.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-5
NAT guidelines
Observe the following guidelines when using Network Address
Translation.
■
The router can export just one local IP address per TCP port, so
you can have just one machine available for a given service,
such as one FTP server. However, some services, such as Web
servers (www-http servers), allow you to change the TCP port
on both the server and client. With two different TCP ports
exported, you can have Web servers on two different IP hosts.
■
Associate your primary Domain Name Server (DNS) with
whichever profile is more accessible. If neither profile is
dial-on-demand, you may associate a secondary DNS with the
other profile.
You can enable Network Address Translation on one connection
profile, disable it on another, and use the two profiles simulta-
neously. The profiles might have the following attributes:
■
A profile with Network Address Translation disabled connects to
your branch or main office. Your company network
administrator has assigned you a local IP address range that is
consistent with the address space assigned to your company
so that you seamlessly integrate when connected. The remote
IP address and mask for this profile define only the company’s
address space, so that the only IP traffic you send over this
connection is for hosts and servers within your company.
■
A Network Address Translation profile connects to the Internet
via an ISP. Even though the ISP assigns you a dynamic address
each time you connect, there will be no address space conflict,
since Network Address Translation hides the corporate address
you use locally. You enter the ISP’s remote IP address as your
default IP gateway so that any IP traffic not intended for your
corporate intranet will be directed to the ISP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
Reference Guide
IP setup
Network
General
IP Setup
Main
Menu
Advanced
Configuration
Protocols
IP Options
Setup
The IP Setup options screen is where you configure the Ethernet
side of the Netopia Router. The information you enter here controls
how the Router routes IP traffic.
Consult your network administrator or Internet Service Provider to
obtain the IP setup information (such as the Ethernet IP Address,
Ethernet Subnet Mask, Default IP Gateway and DNS Server IP
Address) you will need before changing any of the settings in this
screen. Changes made in this screen will take effect only after the
Netopia Router is reset.
To go to the IP Setup options screen, from the Main Menu select
Advanced Configuration and then select Network Protocols Setup
and then select IP Setup.
Note: If you have completed Easy Setup, the information you have
already entered will appear in the IP Setup options screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-7
Small Office models only
IP Setup
Ethernet IP Address:
192.168.6.137
Ethernet Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.248
Default IP Gateway:
0.0.0.0
DNS Server:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server:
Domain Name:
Exported Services...
Follow these steps to configure IP Setup for your Small Office
Netopia Router:
■
■
■
Select Ethernet IP Address and enter the IP address for the
Netopia Router’s Ethernet port.
Select Ethernet Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask for
the Ethernet IP Address that you entered in the last step.
Select Default IP Gateway and enter the IP address for a
default gateway. This can be the address of any major router
accessible to the Netopia Router.
A default gateway should be able to successfully route packets
when the Netopia Router cannot recognize the intended
recipient’s IP address. A typical example of a default gateway is
the ISP’s router.
■
Select DNS Server and enter the IP address for a domain name
server. The domain name server matches the alphabetic
addresses favored by people (for example, robin.hood.com) to
the IP addresses actually used by IP routers (for example,
163.7.8.202).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-8
Reference Guide
■
If a secondary DNS server is available, select Secondary DNS
Server and enter its IP address. The secondary DNS server is
used by the Netopia Router when the primary DNS server is
inaccessible. Entering a secondary DNS is useful but it is not
necessary.
■
■
Select Domain Name and enter your network’s domain name
(for example, farallon.com). Entering a Domain Name is
strongly recommended.
Models supporting
SmartIP only
Select Exported Services. The Exported Services screen
appears with three options, Show/ Change Exports, Add
Export, and Delete Export.
Exported Services
(Local Port to IP Address Remapping)
Show/Change Exports...
Add Export...
Delete Export...
■
Select Add Export. The Add Exported Service screen appears.
Add Exported Service
Service...
Local Server's IP Address:
ADD EXPORT NOW
0.0.0.0
CANCEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-9
■
Select Service. A pop-up menu of services and ports appears.
Add Exported Service
+-Type------Port-+
+----------------+
Service...
| ftp
| telnet
| smtp
| tftp
| gopher
| finger
21
23
25
69
70
79
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Local Server's IP Address:
| www-http 80
| pop2
| pop3
| snmp
| chat
109 |
110 |
161 |
531 |
|
| Other...
+----------------+
ADD EXPORT NOW
CANCEL
Select any of the services/ ports and press Return to associate
it with the address of a server on your local area network.
Press the Escape key when you are finished configuring
Exported Services to go back to the IP Setup screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-10
Reference Guide
Non-Small Office models
only
IP Setup
Ethernet IP Address:
Ethernet Subnet Mask:
192.168.6.137
255.255.255.248
Default IP Gateway:
0.0.0.0
DNS Server:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server:
Domain Name:
Receive RIP:
Transmit RIP:
Off
Off
Static Routes...
Set up the basic IP attributes of your Netopia in this screen.
Follow these steps to configure IP Setup for your Corporate Netopia
Router:
■
■
■
Select Ethernet IP Address and enter the IP address for the
Netopia Router’s Ethernet port.
Select Ethernet Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask for
the Ethernet IP Address that you entered in the last step.
Select Default IP Gateway and enter the IP address for a
default gateway. This can be the address of any major router
accessible to the Netopia Router.
A default gateway should be able to successfully route packets
when the Netopia Router cannot recognize the intended
recipient’s IP address. A typical example of a default gateway is
the ISP’s router.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-11
■
■
Select DNS Server and enter the IP address for a domain name
server. The domain name server matches the alphabetic
addresses favored by people (for example, www.netopia.com)
to the IP addresses actually used by IP routers (for example,
163.7.8.202).
If a secondary DNS server is available, select Secondary DNS
Server and enter its IP address. The secondary DNS server is
used by the Netopia Router when the primary DNS server is
inaccessible. Entering a secondary DNS is useful but it is not
necessary.
■
■
Select Domain Name and enter your network’s domain name
(for example, farallon.com). Entering a Domain Name is
strongly recommended.
Non-Small Office models
only
If there are IP routers on your Ethernet network that the Netopia
Router needs to recognize, select Receive RIP and toggle it to
On. With Receive RIP on, the Netopia Router’s Ethernet port will
accept routing information provided by Routing Information
Protocol (RIP) packets. RIP is used on all Netopia Router
models except the SO-Smart models.
Non-Small Office models
only
■
■
If you want the Netopia Router to advertise its routing table to
other routers via RIP, select Transmit RIP and toggle it to On.
With Transmit RIP on, the Netopia Router will generate RIP
packets to those other routers.
Non-Small Office models
only
Select Static Routes to manually configure IP routes. See the
following section.
Static routes
Static routes are IP routes that are maintained manually. Each static
route acts as a pointer that tells the Netopia Router how to reach a
particular network. However, static routes are used only if they
appear in the IP routing table, which contains all of the routes used
by the Netopia Router (see “IP routing table” on page 9-13).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-12
Reference Guide
Static routes are helpful in situations where a route to a network
must be used and other means of finding the route are unavailable.
For example, static routes are useful when you cannot rely on RIP.
To go to the Static Routes screen, select the Static Routes item in
the IP Setup screen.
Static Routes
Display/Change Static Route...
Add Static Route...
Delete Static Route...
Configure/View/Delete Static Routes from this and the following Screens.
Viewing static routes
To display a view-only table of static routes, select Display/ Change
Static Route in the Static Routes screen.
+-Dest. Network---Subnet Mask-----Next Gateway----Priority-Enabled-+
+------------------------------------------------------------------+
| 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
163.176.8.1
Low
Yes
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------------------------------------------------------------------+
Select a Static Route to modify.
The table has the following columns:
Dest. Network: The network IP address of the destination network.
Subnet Mask: The subnet mask associated with the destination
network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-13
Next Gateway: The IP address of the router that will be used to
reach the destination network.
Priority: An indication whether the Netopia Router will use the static
route when it conflicts with information received from RIP packets.
Enabled: An indication whether the static route should be installed
in the IP routing table.
Adding a static route
To add a new static route, select Add Static Route in the Static
Routes screen and go to the Add Static Route screen.
Add Static Route
Static Route Enabled:
Yes
Destination Network IP Address:
Destination Network Subnet Mask:
Next Gateway IP Address:
Route Priority...
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
High
Advertise Route Via RIP:
No
ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW
CANCEL
Configure a new Static Route in this Screen.
■
Route Enabled and toggle it to Yes. To remove the static route
from the IP routing table, select Static Route Enabled and
toggle it to No.
■
■
Be sure to read the rules on the installation of static routes in
the IP routing table. See “Rules of static route installation” on
page 4-15.
Select Destination Network IP Address and enter the network
IP address of the destination network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-14
Reference Guide
■
■
Select Destination Network Subnet Mask and enter the subnet
mask used by the destination network.
Select Next Gateway IP Address and enter the IP address for
the router that the Netopia Router will use to reach the
destination network. This router does not necessarily have to
be part of the destination network, but it must at least know
where to forward packets destined for that network.
■
Select Route Priority and choose High or Low. High means that
the static route takes precedence over RIP information; Low
means that the RIP information takes precedence over the
static route.
■
■
If the static route conflicts with a connection profile, the
connection profile will always take precedence.
To make sure that the static route is known only to the Netopia
Router, select Advertise Route Via RIP and toggle it to No. To
allow other RIP-capable routers to know about the static route,
select Advertise Route Via RIP and toggle it to Yes. When
Advertise Route Via RIP is toggled to Yes, a new item called
RIP Metric appears below Advertise Route Via RIP.
With RIP Metric you set the number of routers, from 1 to 15,
between the sending router and the destination router. The
maximum number of routers on a packet’s route is 15. Setting
RIP Metric to 1 means that a route can involve 15 routers,
while setting it to 15 means a route can only involve one router.
■
■
Select ADD STATIC ROUTE NOW to save the new static route,
or select CANCEL to discard it and return to the Static Routes
screen.
Up to 16 static routes can be created, but one is always
reserved for the default gateway, which is configured using
either Easy Setup or the IP Setup screen in Advanced
Configuration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-15
Modifying a static route
To modify a static route, select Display/ Change Static Route in the
Static Routes screen to display a table of static routes.
Select a static route from the table and go to the Change Static
Route screen. The parameters in this screen are the same as the
ones in the Add Static Route screen (see “Adding a static route” on
page 4-13).
Deleting a static route
To delete a static route, select Delete Static Route in the Static
Routes screen to display a table of static routes. Select a static
route from the table and press Return to delete it. To exit the table
without deleting the selected static route, press the Escape key.
Rules of static route installation
The Netopia Router applies certain rules before installing enabled
static routes in the IP routing table. An enabled static route will not
be installed in the IP routing table if any of the following conditions
are true:
■
The static route’s Next Gateway IP Address matches the IP
address used by a connection profile or the Netopia Router’s
Ethernet port.
■
The static route’s Next Gateway IP Address matches an IP
address in the range of IP addresses being distributed by
MacIP or DHCP.
■
■
■
The static route’s Next Gateway IP Address is determined to
be unreachable by the Netopia Router.
The static route’s route information conflicts with a connection
profile’s route information.
The connection profile associated with the static route is set for
dial-in connections only, and there is no incoming call
connected to that connection profile.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-16
Reference Guide
■
The connection profile associated with the static route has a
disabled dial-on-demand setting, and there is no current
connection using that connection profile.
A static route is already installed in the IP routing table will be
removed if any of the conditions listed above become true for that
static route. However, an enabled static route is automatically
reinstalled once the conditions listed above are no longer true for
that static route.
IP address serving
IP
• DHCP Setup
• BOOTP Setup
• MacIP Setup
Advanced
Configuration
Main
Menu
Address
Serving
In addition to being a router, the Netopia Router is also an IP
address server. There are four protocols it can use to distribute IP
addresses.
■
The first, called Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP),
is widely supported on PC networks, as well as Apple
Macintosh computers using Open Transport and computers
using the UNIX operating system. Addresses assigned via
DHCP are “leased” or allocated for a short period of time; if a
lease is not renewed, the address becomes available for use by
another computer. DHCP also allows most of the IP
parameters for a computer to be configured by the DHCP
server, simplifying setup of each machine.
■
The second, called BOOTP (also known as Bootstrap Protocol),
is the predecessor to DHCP and allows older IP hosts to obtain
most of the information that a DHCP client would obtain.
However, in contrast, BOOTP address assignments are
“permanent” since there is no lease renewal mechanism in
BOOTP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-17
■
■
The third protocol, called IPCP, is part of the PPP/ MP suite of
wide area protocols used for ISDN WAN connections. It allows
remote terminal adapters and NAT-enabled routers to be
assigned a temporary IP address for the duration of their
connection.
The fourth protocol, called MacIP, is used only for computers
on AppleTalk networks. MacIP provides a protocol translation
(or gateway) function between IP and AppleTalk as well as an IP
address assignment mechanism. Like DHCP, MacIP address
assignments are normally temporary, although you may also
use static IP addresses with MacIP.
Since no two hosts can use the same IP address at the same time,
make sure that the addresses distributed by the Netopia Router,
and those that are manually configured are not the same. Each
method of distribution must have its own exclusive range of
addresses to draw from.
To go to the IP Address Serving screen, select IP Address Serving
in the Advanced Configuration screen and press Return.
IP Address Serving
Server Name is
Netopia PN455 #221393
Number of Client IP Addresses:
1st Client Address:
5
163.176.56.90
Serve DHCP Clients:
Yes
DHCP Serving Options...
DHCP NetBios Options...
Serve BOOTP Clients:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Serve Dynamic WAN Clients
Serve MacIP/KIP Clients:
MacIP/KIP Static Options...
Configure DHCP, BOOTP, WAN IP, and/or MacIP Address Serving here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-18
Reference Guide
Follow these steps to configure IP Address Serving:
■
Server Name is lists the Netopia Router’s name, model number
and individual serial number. It is filled in automatically.
Small Office models only
■
To serve IP addresses to clients, select IP Address Serving and
toggle it to Yes. Activating IP Address Serving automatically
enables DHCP, WAN clients, and dynamic MacIP/ KIP clients (if
you have an AppleTalk model).
■
Select Number of Client IP Addresses and enter the total number
of contiguous IP addresses that the Netopia Router will distribute
to the client machines on your local area network.
■
■
In the screen example shown above, five Client IP addresses
have been allocated.
Select 1st Client Address and enter the first client IP address
that you will allocate to your first client machine. For instance, on
your local area network you may first want to figure out what
machines are going to be allocated specific static IP addresses
so that you can determine the pool of IP addresses that you will
be serving addresses from via DHCP, BOOTP and or MacIP.
■
Example: Your ISP has given your Netopia Router the IP address
192.168.6.137, with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.248. The
subnet mask allocated will give you six IP addresses to use when
connecting to the ISP over the Internet (for more information on
understanding IP addressing refer to Appendix C). Your address
range will be from .137-.143. In this example you would enter
192.168.6.138 as the 1st client address.
Non-Small Office models
■
■
To enable DHCP, select Serve DHCP Clients and toggle it to Yes.
DHCP serving is automatic for other models when IP Address
Serving is enabled.
Non-Small Office models
only
If Yes is selected in Serve DHCP Clients, select DHCP Serving
Options item and press Return. The DHCP Options screen
appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-19
DHCP Options
Serve Domain Name:
Yes
Yes
Domain Name:
Serve Default Gateway:
Default Gateway:
192.168.6.137
Serve DNS Servers:
Yes
Primary DNS Server IP Addr.:
Secondary DNS Server IP Addr.:
163.176.4.10
0.0.0.0
The DHCP Options screen offers a set of parameters that can be
passed to each client requesting an IP address. These additional
parameters simplify each client’s setup.
■
Select Serve Domain Name, toggle to Yes, and press Return. By
toggling this item to Yes, once the domain name is entered the
Netopia Router will send this information to client machines
requesting it. (Note that you will need to configure each client
machine for the Netopia Router and clients to communicate with
each other).
■
In the Domain Name menu item, type in the domain name that
will be used on your network. For example: farallon.com.
■
■
Select Serve Default Gateway, toggle to Yes, and press Return.
In the Default Gateway menu item,enter the IP address of the
Netopia Router.
■
Select Serve DNS Servers, toggle to Yes, and press Return. By
toggling this item to Yes, once the DNS Server’s IP address or
addresses (Primary and Secondary DNS Server IP Address) are
entered the Netopia Router will automatically broadcast this
information to the client machine. (Note that you will need to
configure each client machine for the Netopia Router).
■
In the Primary DNS Server IP Address menu item, the Primary
DNS Server IP Address will be automatically generated from the
connection profile screen if one has been entered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-20
Reference Guide
■
In the Secondary DNS Server IP Address menu item, the
Secondary DNS Server IP Address will be automatically generated
from the connection profile screen, if an address has been
entered. (A secondary DNS IP address is not required, but may
be helpful. For instance, if the Netopia Router attempts to
communicate to the primary DNS but it is unavailable, then it will
attempt to communicate with the secondary DNS. If the
secondary DNS is available and the IP address is resolved than
the Netopia will be able to connect to the ISP or remote network.)
You are now finished setting up DHCP Options. To return to the IP
Address Serving screen press the Escape key once.
DHCP NetBIOS Options
If your network uses NetBIOS, you can enable the Netopia Router to
use DHCP to distribute NetBIOS information.
NetBIOS stands for Network Basic Input/ Output System. It is a layer
of software originally developed by IBM and Sytek to link a network
operating system with specific hardware. NetBIOS has been adopted
as an industry standard. It offers LAN applications, a variety of
“hooks” to carry out inter-application communications and data
transfer. Essentially, NetBIOS is a way for application programs to talk
to the network. To run an application that works with NetBIOS, a
non-IBM network operating system or network interface card must
offer a NetBIOS emulator. Many vendors either provide a version of
NetBIOS to interface with their hardware or emulate its transport layer
communications services in their network products. A NetBIOS
emulator is a program provided by NetWare clients that allow
workstations to run applications that support IBM’s NetBIOS calls.
■
Select Serve NetBIOS Options and press Return. The DHCP
NetBIOS Options screen will appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-21
DHCP NetBios Options
Serve NetBios Type:
Yes
NetBios Type...
Type B
Serve NetBios Scope:
NetBios Scope:
No
Serve NetBios Name Server:
NetBios Name Server IP Addr:
No
0.0.0.0
DHCP allows you to allocate IP Addresses dynamically.
■
■
To serve DHCP clients with the type of NetBIOS used on your
network, select Serve NetBIOS Type and toggle it to Yes.
From the NetBIOS Type pop-up menu, select the type of NetBIOS
used on your network.
DHCP NetBios Options
+--------+
Serve NetBios Type:
NetBios Type...
+--------+
| Type B |
| Type P |
| Type M |
| Type H |
+--------+
No
Serve NetBios Scope:
NetBios Scope:
Serve NetBios Name Server:
NetBios Name Server IP Addr:
0.0.0.0
■
■
To serve DHCP clients with the NetBIOS scope, select Serve
NetBIOS Scope and toggle it to Yes.
Select NetBIOS Scope and enter the scope.
To serve DHCP clients with the IP address of a NetBIOS name
server, select Serve NetBIOS Name Server and toggle it to Yes.
Select NetBIOS Name Server IP Address and enter the IP
address for the NetBIOS name server.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-22
Reference Guide
You are now finished setting up DHCP NetBIOS Options. To return
to the IP Address Serving screen press the Escape key once.
■
To enable BOOTP’s address serving capability, select Serve
BOOTP Clients and toggle to Yes.
Note: Addresses assigned through BOOTP are permanently
allocated from the IP Address Serving pool. To release these
addresses, toggle Serve BOOTP Clients to No and restart your
Netopia Router.
MacIP (Kip Forwarding) Options
When hosts using AppleTalk (typically those using LocalTalk) are not
directly connected to an IP network (usually an ethernet), they must
use a MacIP (AppleTalk-IP) gateway. Such a service is provided by
AppleTalk models of the Netopia Routers. A MacIP gateway converts
network traffic into the correct format for AppleTalk or IP, depending
on the traffic’s destination. The MacIP gateway can also distribute IP
addresses to AppleTalk computers on the network.
Note: Macintosh computers that have LocalTalk or EtherTalk selected
in the MacTCP control panel, or “AppleTalk (MacIP)” selected in the
TCP/ IP control panel, must use the MacIP gateway to communicate
with the Internet or any other IP network. Users should point their
MacTCP or TCP/ IP control panel to look in the LocalTalk zone for the
MacIP server. Macintosh computers that have Ethernet selected in
the MacTCP or TCP/ IP control panel can do their own AppleTalk-IP
conversions.
Setting up MacIP involves choosing MacIP dynamic address serving
and then configuring that type. KIP forwarding is simply a method for
distributing IP addresses to AppleTalk clients.
To go to the MacIP Setup screen, select MacIP/ KIP Clients in the IP
Address Serving screen from the Advanced Configuration menu.
Non-Small Office
AppleTalk models only
■
Select Serve Mac IP/ KIP Clients and toggle to Yes, to enable
MacIP/ KIP address serving capability. This option is
automatically enabled on Small Office models if AppleTalk and IP
Address Serving are enabled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Setup
4-23
Non-Small Office
AppleTalk models only
■
Select MacIP/ KIP Static Options and press Return. The MacIP
(KIP) Forwarding Setup screen tells the Netopia Router how many
static addresses to allocate for MacIP/ KIP clients. The addresses
must fall within the address pool from the previous screen. You
will need to enter the number of static MacIP addresses to
reserve in this screen. Note that the address pool IP range will
also be listed for your referral in this screen.
MacIP (KIP) Forwarding Setup
This screen tells the Netopia how many static addresses to allocate for
MacIP/KIP clients. The addresses must fall within the address pool from the
previous screen -- 163.176.56.90 to 163.176.56.94.
Number of Static Addresses:
First Static Client Address:
0
0.0.0.0
Reserve static MacIP addresses for KIP Forwarding here.
You have finished setting up IP Setup.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-24
Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1
Chapter 5
IPX Setup
Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX) is the network protocol used by
Novell NetWare networks. This chapter shows you how to configure
the Netopia Router for routing data using IPX. You also learn how to
configure the router to serve IPX network addresses.
The Netopia Router supports the following IPX features:
■
■
■
IPX RIP and SAP
NetBIOS broadcast packet forwarding (IPX type 20)
IPX packet filtering definable by source and destination IPX
address and socket number, for added security
■
■
IPX SAP filtering to aid in optimizing WAN bandwidth
Dial-on-demand features:
■
Spoofing of IPX keep-alive, SPX, and server serialization
packets
■
Configurable RIP/ SAP timers on connection profiles
IPX Definitions
This section defines IPX-related protocols such as RIP, SAP and
NetBIOS, in addition to other related terms. See the next section for
setup instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Reference Guide
Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX)
IPX is a datagram, connectionless protocol that Novell adapted from
Xerox Network System’s (XNS) Internet Datagram Protocol (IDP). IPX
is dynamically routed, and the routing architecture works by
“learning” network addressing automatically.
IPX address
An IPX address consists of a network number, a node number, and a
socket number. An IPX network number is composed of eight
hexadecimal digits. The network number must be the same for all
nodes on a particular physical network segment. The node number
is composed of twelve hexadecimal digits and is usually the
hardware address of the interface card. The node number must be
unique inside the particular IPX network. Socket numbers
correspond to the particular service being accessed.
Socket
A socket in IPX is the equivalent of a port in TCP/ IP. Sockets route
packets to different processes within a single node. Novell has
reserved several sockets for use in the NetWare environment:
Field Value
Packet Type
Description
00h
Unknown Packet Type
Used for all packets not
classified by any other type
01h
04h
Routing Information
Packet
Unused for RIP packets
Used for SAP packets
Service Advertising
Packet
05h
11h
Sequenced Packet
Used for SPX packets
Used for NCP packets
NetWare Core Protocol
Packet
14h
Propagated Packet
Used for Novell NetBIOS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup
5-3
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
RIP, which was also derived from XNS, is a protocol that allows for
the bidirectional transfer of routing tables and provides timing
information (ticks), so that the fastest route to a destination can be
determined. IPX routers use RIP to create and dynamically maintain
databases of internetwork routing information. See the last section
in this chapter for more information on routing tables.
Service Advertising Protocol (SAP)
SAP is a protocol that provides servers and routers with a method
to exchange service information. Using SAP, servers advertise their
services and addresses. Routers collect this information to
dynamically update their routing tables and share it with other
routers. These broadcasts keep all routers on the internetwork
synchronized and provide real-time information on accessible
servers on the internetwork.
The following is a list of common SAP server types:
Unknown
0000h
0003h
0004h
0005h
0007h
0009h
0024h
0047h
8000h
Print Queue
File Server
Job Server
Print Server
Archive Server
Remote Bridge Server
Advertising Print Server
Reserved Up To
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Reference Guide
NetBIOS
NetBIOS is a protocol that performs tasks related to the Transport
and Session layers of the OSI model. It can operate over IPX, using
a special broadcast packet known as “IPX Packet type 20” to
communicate with IPX NetBIOS servers.
IPX Spoofing
Applicable only to ISDN
switched lines
The Netopia has several IPX features designed to restrict the traffic
on the ISDN link when the unit is not sending or receiving IPX data.
When the link is idle and a user is logged into a Novell server, the
server will send “keep alive” packets to ensure the user is still
there. If the link is idle, the “keep alive” packets will be sent back to
the server by the locally connected Netopia router as though they
came back from the user without bringing up the ISDN link.
Similarly, “SPX keep alive” packets are treated in this manner. IPX
RIP, and SAP messages will not be sent if the link is down. Together
these features enable the user to remain connected to a Novell
server or SPX peer without bringing up the ISDN link, except to send
and receive actual user data.
IPX setup
Network
General
Main
Menu
Advanced
Configuration
IPX Setup
Protocols
IP Options
Setup
The IPX Setup screen is where you configure the Ethernet side of
the Netopia Router. The information you enter here controls how the
Router routes IPX traffic.
Consult your network administrator for the IPX setup information you
will need before changing any of the settings in this screen.
Changes made in this screen will take effect only after the Netopia
Router is reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup
5-5
To go to the IPX Setup screen, from the Main Menu select Advanced
Configuration and then select Network Protocols Setup and then
select IPX Setup.
Note: If you have completed Easy Setup, the information you have
already entered will appear in the IP Setup options screen.
IPX Setup
IPX Routing:
On
Ethernet Encapsulation...
Ethernet Network Address:
802.3
00000000
Ethernet Path Delay:
1
Ethernet NetBios Forwarding:
No
Ethernet Inbound SAP Filter Set... <<NONE>>
Default Gateway Address:
Filters and Filter Sets...
IPX Wan Pool Base Address
00000000
00000000
Set up the basic IPX attributes of your Netopia in this screen.
1. To enable IPX routing, select IPX Routing, toggle it to Yes, and
press Return.
2. To change Ethernet encapsulation from the commonly used
802.3 standard, select Ethernet Encapsulation and choose a
different encapsulation method.
3. Select Ethernet Network Address and enter the network
address of the IPX network connected to the Netopia Router’s
Ethernet port.
Note: If the Ethernet network address is set to zero, the Router
will attempt to learn the address from any configured IPX device
on the Ethernet network or from the remote IPX network when a
call is established.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Reference Guide
4. To change the default path delay, select Ethernet Path Delay
and enter a value (in ticks). This value is used to determine the
port cost of using the Ethernet port in IPX RIP calculations.
5. To enable NetBIOS packet forwarding, select Ethernet NetBIOS
Forwarding and toggle it to Yes. This parameter will determine
whether “IPX Packet type 20” packets are forwarded on the
Ethernet interface. These packets are used by NetBIOS and
some other applications.
6. Select Ethernet Inbound SAP Filter Set to filter incoming IPX
SAP advertisements on the Ethernet. By attaching an incoming
SAP filter on the Ethernet, you can restrict the number of SAP
entries learned on a large IPX network to only those required by
remote users connecting to the Netopia Router. An Ethernet
SAP filter must be used with networks that have so many
servers advertised that the Netopia Router would otherwise
exhaust its internal memory storing server entries.
To attach a SAP filter set, first define the filter set using the
Filters and Filter Sets option (see step 8 below). Then select
the filter set from the Ethernet Incoming SAP Filter Set pop-up
menu. To detach the filter set, select Detach Filter Set.
7. Select Default Gateway Address, and enter the network
address of the IPX network to which all packets of unknown
destination address should be routed.
Note: The Default Gateway Address is usually set up to match
the IPX Address in your network Connection Profile.
8. To configure filters and filter sets, select Filters and Filter Sets
and go to the IPX filters and filter sets screens. For information
on how to configure IPX filters and filter sets, see “IPX filters”
on page 5-8.
9. Select IPX Wan Pool Base Address and enter the first IPX
network address to be allocated to requesting IPX WAN clients.
The base address you enter must not conflict with other IPX
networks assigned to your IPX internet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup
5-7
IPX in the answer profile
The answer profile can be configured to accept calls from remote
IPX networks. To configure the answer profile to accept calls from
remote IPX networks, go to the Default Answer Profile screen.
Note: The Default Answer Profile screen varies according to
configuration.
Default Answer Profile
Authentication...
None
Force 56k on Answer:
No
Max. Receive Packet Size:
Stac Data Compression...
1500
None
Must Match a Defined Profile:
No
B Channel Usage...
Idle Timeout:
1 B Channel
120
IP Enabled:
Yes
Yes
IP Parameters...
IPX Enabled:
IPX Parameters...
Configure values which may be used when receiving a call in this screen.
toggle it to Yes. When IPX Enabled is set to Yes, the item IPX
Parameters appears below it.
To configure IPX routing in the answer profile, select IPX Parameters
and go to the IPX Parameters (Default Answer Profile) screen. The
items in this screen are similar to the IPX Profile Parameters items
of the same name (see page 5-7).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
Reference Guide
IPX Parameters (Default Answer Profile)
NetBios Packet Forwarding:
Off
Incoming Packet Filter Set...
Outgoing Packet Filter Set...
Incoming SAP Filter Set...
Outgoing SAP Filter Set...
Detach Filter Sets...
Periodic RIP Timer:
Periodic SAP Timer:
60
60
Configure IPX values to use when no matching Profile can be found.
IPX filters
IPX Filters
and Filter Sets
Filter Sets
(Firewalls)
Advanced
Config.
Main
Menu
IPX packet filters work very similarly to IP packet filters. They filter
data traffic coming from or going to remote IPX networks. IPX filters
can be set up to pass or discard IPX packets based on a number of
user-defined criteria. Like IP filters, IPX filters must be grouped in
sets that are applied to the answer profile or to connection profiles.
IPX SAP filters are used for filtering server entries not required to
pass over the WAN links. When connecting to a large IPX network via
ISDN, the transfer of large numbers of SAP entries can consume
significant bandwidth on the WAN link.
Note: Using SAP filtering to prevent a server from being advertised
does not provide security against that server being accessed—IPX
packet filtering must be used for that purpose.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup
5-9
Setting up and using IPX filter sets is a four-step process:
1. Create the filters to use.
2. Create the filter sets to use.
3. Add filters to the filter sets.
4. Attach the filter sets to the answer profile or to connection
profiles.
You can configure IPX filters and set up IPX filter sets from the IPX
Filters and Filter Sets screen.
IPX Filters and Filter Sets
Show/Change IPX Packet Filters...
Add IPX Packet Filter...
Delete IPX Packet Filter...
Show/Change IPX Packet Filter Sets...
Add IPX Packet Filter Set...
Delete IPX Packet Filter Set...
Show/Change IPX Sap Filters...
Add IPX Sap Filter...
Delete IPX Sap Filter...
Show/Change IPX Sap Filter Sets...
Add IPX Sap Filter Set...
Delete IPX Sap Filter Set...
Define your filters 1st. IPX Filter Sets refer to, but don't contain, filters.
The items in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen are grouped into
four areas:
■
■
■
■
IPX packet filters
IPX packet filter sets
IPX SAP filters
IPX SAP filter sets
The following sections explain the items in each of these areas.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
Reference Guide
IPX packet filters
For each IPX packet filter, you can configure a set of parameters to
match on the source or destination attributes of IPX data packets
coming from or going to the WAN.
Viewing and modifying packet filters
To display a view-only table of IPX packet filters, select
Show/ Change IPX Packet Filters in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets
screen.
To modify any of the filters in the table, note the desired filter and
press Return to go to the Change Packet Filter screen. The
parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add
Packet Filter screen (see the next section).
Adding a packet filter
To add a new IPX packet filter, select Add IPX Packet Filter in the
IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and press Return to go to the Add
Packet Filter screen.
Add Packet Filter
Filter Name:
IPX Filter 1
Source Network:
Source Node Address:
Source Socket:
00000000
000000000000
0000
Destination Network:
00000000
Destination Node Address: 000000000000
Destination Socket:
ADD FILTER NOW
0000
CANCEL
Configure a new IPX Packet Filter. Finished? ADD or CANCEL to exit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup
5-11
By default, the filter’s socket numbers and network and node
addresses are null (all zeros). This sets the filter to match on any
IPX data packet. You should configure the filter using criteria that
meet your security needs.
1. Select Filter Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter.
2. To specify a source network for the filter to match on, select
Source Network and enter an IPX network address.
3. To specify a source node for the filter to match on, select
Source Node Address and enter an IPX node address.
4. To specify a source socket for the filter to match on, select
Source Socket and enter an IPX source socket number.
5. To specify a destination network for the filter to match on,
select Destination Network and enter an IPX network address.
6. To specify a destination node for the filter to match on, select
Destination Node Address and enter an IPX node address.
7. To specify a destination socket for the filter to match on, select
Destination Socket and enter an IPX destination socket
number.
8. Select ADD FILTER NOW to save the current filter. Select
CANCEL to exit the Add Packet Filter screen without saving the
new filter.
Deleting a packet filter
To delete a packet filter, select Delete IPX Packet Filter in the IPX
Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a table of filters. Select a
filter from the table and press Return to delete it. Press the Escape
key to exit the table without deleting the filter.
IPX packet filter sets
Before the individual filters can be used, IPX packet filters must be
grouped into sets. A filter can be part of more than one filter set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
Reference Guide
Viewing and modifying packet filter sets
To display a table of IPX packet filter sets, select Show/ Change IPX
Packet Filter Sets in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen.
To modify any of the filter sets in the list, select the desired filter set
and press Return to go to the Change Packet Filter Set screen. The
parameters in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add
Packet Filter Set screen (see the next section).
Adding a packet filter set
To add a new IPX packet filter set, select Add IPX Packet Filter Set
in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and press Return to go to
the Add Packet Filter Set screen.
Add Packet Filter Set
Filter Set Name:
Show Filters/Change Action on Match...
Append Filter...
Detach Filter...
ADD FILTER SET NOW
CANCEL
Modify an IPX Packet Filter here. Changes are immediate.
Follow these steps to configure the new packet filter set:
1. Select Filter Set Name and enter a descriptive name for the
filter set.
2. To change the forwarding action of filters in the filter set, select
Show Filters/ Change Action on Match and press Return to go
to the Show Filters/ Change Actions on Match screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup
5-13
Show Filters/Change Actions on Match
Filter Name---------------------Forward
Filter 1
No
Filter 2
No
<<NO MATCH>>
Yes
Set whether filters forward or drop matching packets here.
Select a filter and toggle the packet forwarding action to Yes
(pass) or No (discard).
3. To add a filter to the filter set, select Append Filter to display a
table of filters. Select a filter from the table and press Return to
add it to the filter set. The default action of newly added filters
is to not forward packets that match their criteria.
To exit the table without adding the filter, press the Escape key.
4. To remove a filter from the filter set, select Detach Filter to
display a table of appended filters. Select a filter from the table
and press Return to remove it from the set. To exit the table
without removing the filter, press the Escape key.
5. Select ADD FILTER SET NOW to save the current filter set.
Select CANCEL to exit the Add Packet Filter Set screen without
saving the new filter set.
Deleting a packet filter set
To delete a packet filter set, select Delete IPX Packet Filter Set in
the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets.
Select a filter set from the list and press Return to delete it. Press
the Escape key to exit the list without deleting the filter set.
Note: Deleting a filter set does not delete the filters in that set.
However, the filters in the deleted set are no longer in effect (unless
they are part of another set). The deleted set will no longer appear
in the answer profile or any connection profiles to which it was
added.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
Reference Guide
IPX SAP filters
For each IPX SAP filter, you can configure a set of parameters to
match on certain attributes of IPX SAP packet entries. The filters
check IPX SAP packets for entries that match and then act on those
entries. The SAP packets themselves are always allowed to
continue after their entries are checked.
The purpose of filtering SAP packets is not to make your network
more secure, but to add efficiency to network bandwidth use.
Filtering SAP packets may reduce the size of SAP packets and SAP
bindery tables by removing unwanted entries.
Viewing and modifying SAP filters
To display a table of IPX SAP filters, select Show/ Change IPX SAP
Filters in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen.
To modify any of the filters in the table, select the desired filter and
press Return to go to the Change SAP Filter screen. The parameters
in this screen are the same as the ones in the Add SAP Filter screen
(see the next section).
Adding a SAP filter
To add a new IPX SAP filter, select Add IPX SAP Filter in the IPX
Filters and Filter Sets screen and press Return to go to the Add SAP
Filter screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup
5-15
Add SAP Filter
Filter Name:
Server Name:
Socket:
0000
Type:
0000
IPX Network:
00000000
IPX Node Address:
000000000000
ADD FILTER NOW
CANCEL
Configure a new IPX SAP Filter. Finished? ADD or CANCEL to exit.
By default, the filter’s socket and type numbers and network and
node addresses are null (all zeros). This sets the filter to match on
any IPX SAP packet entry. You should configure the filter using
criteria that meet your needs.
Follow these steps to configure the new SAP filter:
1. Select Filter Name and enter a descriptive name for the filter.
2. To specify a server name for the filter to match on, select
Server Name and enter the name of an IPX server. You can use
the wildcard characters * (asterisk) and ? (question mark). Use
* to match any string, including a null string (no characters),
and ? to match any single character in the server’s name. For
example, the filter could match on the server name
“FARALLON” with “FARA*”, “FARAL?ON”, and “FARALLON*”.
3. To specify a socket for the filter to match on, select Socket and
enter an IPX socket number.
4. To specify a type number for the filter to match on, select Type
and enter an IPX type number.
5. To specify an IPX network address for the filter to match on,
select IPX Network and enter an IPX network address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
Reference Guide
6. To specify an IPX node address for the filter to match on, select
IPX Node Address and enter an IPX node address.
7. Select ADD FILTER NOW to save the current filter. Select
CANCEL to exit the Add SAP Filter screen without saving the
new filter.
Deleting a SAP filter
To delete a SAP filter, select Delete IPX SAP filter in the IPX Filters
and Filter Sets screen to display a table of filters. Select a filter from
the table and press Return to delete it. Press the Escape key to exit
the table without deleting the filter.
IPX SAP filter sets
Before IPX SAP filters can be used, they must be grouped into sets.
A SAP filter can be part of more than one filter set.
Viewing and modifying SAP filter sets
To display a table of IPX SAP filter sets, select Show/ Change IPX
SAP Filter Sets in the IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a
list of filter sets.
To modify any of the filter sets in the list, select the desired filter set
and go to the Change SAP Filter Set screen. The parameters in this
screen are the same as the ones in the Add SAP Filter Set screen
(see the previous section).
Adding a SAP filter set
To add a new IPX SAP filter set, select Add IPX SAP Filter Set in the
IPX Filters and Filter Sets screen and go to the Add SAP Filter Set
screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup
5-17
Add SAP Filter Set
Filter Set Name:
Show Filters/Change Action on Match...
Append Filter...
Detach Filter...
ADD FILTER SET NOW
CANCEL
Modify an IPX SAP filter here. Changes are immediate.
Follow these steps to configure the new SAP filter set:
1. Select Filter Set Name and enter a descriptive name for the
filter set.
2. To change the forwarding action of filters in the filter set, select
Show Filters/ Change Action on Match and press Return to go
to the Show Filters/ Change Actions on Match screen.
Show Filters/Change Actions on Match
Filter Name---------------------Forward
Filter 1
No
Filter 2
No
<<NO MATCH>>
Yes
Set whether filters forward or drop matching packets here.
Select a filter and toggle the entry forwarding action to Yes
(pass) or No (discard).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Reference Guide
3. To add a filter to the filter set, select Append Filter to display a
table of filters. Select a filter from the table and press Return to
add it to the filter set. The default action of newly added filters
is to not forward (discard) packet entries that match their
criteria.
To exit the table without adding the filter, press the Escape key.
4. To remove a filter from the filter set, select Detach Filter to
display a table of appended filters. Select a filter from the table
and press Return to remove it from the set. To exit the table
without removing the filter, press the Escape key.
5. Select ADD FILTER SET NOW to save the current filter set.
Select CANCEL to exit the Add SAP Filter Set screen without
saving the new filter set.
Deleting a SAP filter set
To delete a SAP filter set, select Delete IPX SAP Filter Set in the IPX
Filters and Filter Sets screen to display a list of filter sets. Select a
filter set from the list and press Return to delete it. Press the
Escape key to exit the list without deleting the filter set.
Note: Deleting a filter set does not delete the filters in that set.
However, the filters in the deleted set are no longer in effect (unless
they are part of another set). The deleted set will no longer appear
in the answer profile or any connection profiles to which it was
added.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IPX Setup
5-19
IPX routing tables
• IPX Routing Table
• IPX SAP Bindery Table
Main
Menu
Statistics, Utilities, Tests
Routing Tables
IPX routing tables provide information on current IPX routes and
services.
To go to the IPX Routing Table screen, select IPX Routing Table in
the Routing Tables screen. This table shows detailed information
about current IPX network routes.
IPX Routing Table
Net Addr-Hops-Ticks-Type--Status-Interface--------------via Router------------
-----------------------------------SCROLL UP----------------------------------
00000020
00000030
00000033
00000100
00000110
2
2
4
2
1
3 RIP
12 RIP
14 RIP
7 RIP
Active Ethernet
Active Ethernet
Active Ethernet
Active Ethernet
Active Ethernet
00000120:00000c465c2f
00000120:00000c465c2f
000000120:00000c465c2f
00000120:00000c465c2f
00000120:00000c465c2f
1 RIP
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN-----------------------------
To go to the IPX SAP Bindery Table screen, select IPX SAP Bindery
Table in the Routing Tables screen. This table shows detailed
information about available IPX services and their location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1
Chapter 6
AppleTalk Setup
This chapter discusses the concept of AppleTalk routing and how to
configure AppleTalk Setup for a Netopia Router with AppleTalk
capability. AppleTalk is available on the Netopia Router’s 400 series
which includes both the Small Office and Corporate models. This
chapter will discuss both versions. Skip this chapter if this
information does not apply to your particular Netopia model.
AppleTalk networks
A network is a communication system that connects computers
together to share information using network services, such as
electronic mail, print spoolers, and file servers. Information is
transferred over a cabling system or WAN using a common set of
protocols. You can think of the cabling system as an organization of
cities, streets, and buildings and the protocols as the method of
sending letters or packages, as illustrated on the following pages. A
cable is the physical medium (for example, twisted pair or coaxial)
over which information travels from one device to another.
AppleTalk is a protocol set for local area networks developed by
Apple Computer. While initially applied to the LocalTalk cabling
system for connecting Macintosh computers and LaserWriters, it
has been expanded to use other cabling systems, such as Ethernet,
as well as the dial-up telephone networks and packet switching
systems. LocalTalk was originally known as the AppleTalk Personal
Network system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Reference Guide
Each computer or peripheral device (printer, client, file server)
connected to a network is called a node and has a unique node
address, which can be any number from 1 to 254. Whenever you
open the Chooser or any application that communicates with other
computers on your network, your application compiles a list of all
node names and addresses. All you see are the names --- for
example, “Paul’sMac,” “TechSportsWriter,” or “2nd Floor
AppleShare” --- but your application also knows the node addresses
of all these devices.
When you send information, commands, or requests to a printer,
server, or another workstation, your application formats the
information into units known as packets. It then attaches the
correct address to the packets and sends them to the AppleTalk
software on your computer, which forwards the packets across the
network. Packets also include a return address, so the receiver will
know where to reply.
If the cabling of your network were a street system, then a node
address would correspond to a building’s street address. Node
addresses are not permanent. Each AppleTalk device determines its
node address at startup. Although a Macintosh that is starting up
will try to use its previous address, the address will often be
different every time you restart. This dynamic node addressing
scheme prevents conflicts when devices are moved between
networks and simplifies the administrative tasks of a network. If you
have only one network, the node address alone is all the
information AppleTalk needs to send a packet from one computer to
another.
However, networks can be connected together through routers,
such as the Netopia Router, into an internetwork (often shortened
to internet). Because devices on different networks can have
duplicate node numbers, AppleTalk tells them apart according to an
additional part of their addresses: the network number.
The Router assigns a unique network number to each member
network. In terms of the city street metaphor, the network number is
similar to the name of the city. Putting a network number together
with a node number fully specifies the address of a node on an
internet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup
6-3
To make the services on an internet manageable, groups of devices
on a network can be grouped into zones. When this is done,
selecting a network service (server, etc.) includes choosing a zone
from which the service can be selected. Like network numbers,
zone names are assigned by routers.
A routing table is maintained by each AppleTalk router. The table
serves as a map of the internet, specifying the path and distance,
in hops, between its router and other networks. The routing table is
used to determine whether a router will forward a data packet and,
if so, to which network.
You can use the information in the AppleTalk routing table to
observe and diagnose the Netopia Router’s current connections to
other AppleTalk routers. To go to the AT Routing Table screen from
the Netopia Router’s console, select Statistics, Utilities, Tests
from the Main Menu and then select Routing Tables and AppleTalk
Routing Table.
AT Routing Table
-Net---Range--Def Zone Name----------Hops-State-Next Rtr Addr.--Pkts Fwded
----------------------------------SCROLL UP--------------------------
1
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
27
31
Admin
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
0
Admin
0
3
Operations
Sales
0
4
0
5
Marketing
Marketing
Customer Service
TechSports
R&D
0
6
1
7
1
8
0
10
11
12
16
*24
28
0
R&D
0
R&D
0
UNIX Services
Operations
R&D
0
79
15
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN-------------------------
UPDATE'*' Entries have multiple zone names. Return/Enter on these to see zone list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Reference Guide
A router has multiple communications ports and is capable of
forwarding information to other routers and devices on the internet.
The router performs packet forwarding, network and device address
maintenance, and other administrative functions required by the
AppleTalk protocols. The distinction between routers and bridges is
an important one:
■
A true bridge, like a router, is used to join two cable segments
and filter traffic between them. The result is still one expanded
network rather than an internet. Bridges do not assign network
numbers or zone names, nor do they maintain network maps.
■
A router maintains the separate identities of the networks it
connects; the result is an internet.
MacIP
When Macintosh computers encapsulate TCP/ IP packets in
administrative reasons, they must use the services of a MacIP
gateway. This gateway converts network traffic into the correct
format for AppleTalk or IP, depending on the traffic’s destination.
Setting up MacIP involves enabling the feature and optionally setting
up a range of addresses to be static.
See Chapter 4, “IP Setup.” for more information on how to set up
MacIP and other IP addressing schemes.
AURP
AppleTalk Update-Based Routing Protocol (AURP) allows AppleTalk
networks to communicate across an IP network. Your local AppleTalk
networks (connected to the Netopia Router) can exchange data with
remote AppleTalk networks that are also connected to an
AURP-capable router.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup
6-5
When two networks using AppleTalk communicate with each other
through a network based on the Internet Protocol, they are said to
be tunneling through the IP network. The Netopia Router uses AURP
to allow your AppleTalk network to tunnel to designated AppleTalk
partner networks, as well as to accept connections from remote
AppleTalk networks tunneling to your AppleTalk LAN.
Routers and seeding
To configure AppleTalk networks, you must understand the concept
of seeding. Seeding is the process by which routers (or more
specifically, router ports) agree on what routing information is valid.
AppleTalk routers that have been reset, for example, must decide
what zones and network numbers are valid before they begin
routing. In this case, a router may use the information it has stored,
or use information it receives from another router, depending on
how it has been configured.
To help ensure agreement between routers on a network, a seed
router is configured with the correct information, and other routers
obtain their information from that router when they are turned on or
reset.
Routers commonly use one of three types of seeding procedures:
hard seeding, soft seeding, and non-seeding.
Hard seeding: When a router that uses hard seeding is turned on or
reset, it requests network number and zone name information from
any existing routers on the networks it will serve. If no other routers
reply, the router uses the network numbers and zone names
specified in its own configuration. If other routers reply, and their
information matches the router’s own configuration information, the
result is the same—the router uses the values in its own
configuration. However, if other routers provide network numbers or
zone names that conflict with those in the router’s configuration, the
router disables any of its own ports for which there are conflicts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Reference Guide
Soft seeding: When a router that uses soft seeding is turned on or
reset, it requests network number and zone name information from
any existing routers on the networks it will serve. If no other routers
reply, the router uses the network numbers and zone names
specified in its own configuration. If other routers reply, the router
uses the information they provide, regardless of whether or not
there are conflicts between the information received and its
configured information. Once the soft seeding router begins to
route, it can serve as a seed router, providing network number and
zone name information to other routers upon request. The default
state of the Netopia Router’s AppleTalk ports is soft seeding.
Non-seeding: When a router that uses non-seeding is turned on or
reset, it requests network number and zone name information from
any existing routers on the networks it will serve. For any network
where no other routers reply, the non-seeding router will not have
any active ports until the next reset.
You should set the Netopia Router’s seeding action to work best in
your particular network environment. These scenarios may guide
you in deciding how to set the router’s seeding:
■
If the Netopia Router is the only router on your network, you
must set it to either hard seeding or soft seeding. The default
is soft seeding.
■
If there is another active router on your network, and you want
that router to configure the Netopia Router’s EtherTalk or
LocalTalk parameters, you can set the Netopia Router to
non-seeding.
■
■
If there is another active router on your network, you could set
the Netopia Router to be soft seeding if you are unsure that the
second router would always be available to configure the
Netopia Router’s EtherTalk or LocalTalk parameters.
If you want the Netopia Router to configure the EtherTalk or
LocalTalk parameters of other routers on your network, you
must set it to hard seeding. In this case, the other routers must
be soft seeding or non-seeding, and the Netopia Router must
already be active when those other routers are rebooted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup
6-7
■
If you want the Netopia Router and all other routers on your
network to use only their own configurations, set the Netopia
Router and all other routers to hard seeding. In this case, any
any other router. This last scenario could be useful for detecting
and locating routing errors on your network.
For information on how to configure AppleTalk setup for Small Office
models, see below. For information on how to configure AppleTalk
setup for Corporate models, see “AppleTalk Setup for Corporate
models” on page 6-9.
AppleTalk Setup for Small Office models
AppleTalk setup for Small Office Netopia Routers consists of
configuring the options in the AppleTalk Setup screen.
To go to the AppleTalk Setup screen, select AppleTalk Setup in the
Network Protocols Setup screen and press Return.
AppleTalk Setup
AppleTalk Routing:
On
AppleTalk Zone Name:
Unnamed
EtherTalk Net Number (0..65279):
LocalTalk Net Number (0..65279):
33051
33050
AURP Partner Address or Name:
Initiate Connection:
No
Accept AURP Connections from...
Tickle Interval (HH:MM:SS):
Anyone
00:00:00
Configure basic AppleTalk services here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Reference Guide
1. Select AppleTalk Routing and toggle to On.
2. Select AppleTalk Zone Name and enter a name of your choice
(this will apply to both the EtherTalk and LocalTalk networks) to
distinguish your network from the other facilities. The two
different networks will appear in the same zone.
3. Observe EtherTalk Net Number. This value is the EtherTalk
network number. You may type in a new network number, or
leave the value as it originally appears.
4. Observe LocalTalk Net Number. This value is the LocalTalk
network number. You may type in a new net number, or leave
the value as it originally appears.
5. Select AURP Partner Address or Name and enter the AURP
partner’s IP address or domain name. If you do not know the
remote network’s IP address, enter its domain name. Domain
names are the Internet addresses favored by people (for
example: twain.gov, chagall.arts.edu, etc.). Domain names are
matched to the IP addresses actually used by the router (for
example: 163.7.8.202).
6. Once you enter the IP address or domain name of the remote
AppleTalk network that you would like to connect to, an
additional field appears. To initiate a connection with an AURP
partner, select Initiate Connection and toggle it to Yes.
Note: Small Office users can only create one AURP partner.
7. Select Accept AURP Connections and press Return. You have
two choices for accepting AURP connections. A pop-up menu
appears with the options Configured Partners Only or Anyone.
Choosing Configured Partners Only will tell the Router to only
accept a connection from the pre-defined partner. Choosing
Anyone will allow any AURP machine to connect.
8. Select Tickle Interval (HH:MM:SS) and set the timer to
indicate how often a tickle or ‘are you still there’ packet will be
sent to the remote AppleTalk network.
This parameter can be set between 0 and 100 hours. If this
value is set to 0, the Netopia Router will never send out a tickle
packet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup
6-9
You have finished configuring AppleTalk Setup for the Small Office
model.
AppleTalk Setup for Corporate models
AppleTalk setup for Corporate Netopia Routers consists of
configuring EtherTalk, LocalTalk, and AURP.
EtherTalk Setup
To go to the EtherTalk Setup options screen, select Network
Protocols Setup and then select AppleTalk Setup in the Advanced
Configuration screen. Select EtherTalk Phase II Setup and press
Return.
EtherTalk Phase II Setup
EtherTalk Phase II Enabled:
Show Zones...
+---------ET II Zone List----------+
+----------------------------------+
| Unnamed
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Enter New Zone Name:
Delete Zone Name...
Set Default Zone...
Net Low:
Net Hi:
Seeding...
+----------------------------------+
Up/Down Arrow Keys to select, ESC to dismiss.
■
If you are using EtherTalk Phase II on the Ethernet network
connected to Netopia Router, select EtherTalk Phase ll Enabled
and toggle it to On.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
Reference Guide
■
■
To view the zones available to EtherTalk Phase ll, select Show
Zones and press Return. You can dismiss the list of zones by
pressing the Return or Escape key.
Select Enter New Zone Name to enter a new zone name.
Note: Your EtherTalk network number and zone name must
match the values in use on the EtherTalk network.
If another router is already present on the EtherTalk network
that you will be connecting to the Netopia Router, use the zone
name and network number used by that router for that
EtherTalk network. Otherwise, your EtherTalk network may
experience routing conflicts.
As an alternative, you can set EtherTalk seeding to soft seeding
and let the Netopia Router receive the zone name and network
number from the other router.
■
■
To remove zones from the list, select Delete Zone Name and
press Return to see the zones list. Use the Up and Down Arrow
keys to select the zone to delete. Press the Return key to
delete it and exit the list. Press the Escape key to exit the list
without deleting any zones.
Select Set Default Zone to choose a different default zone.
This is the zone where Netopia’s EtherTalk Phase II port is
visible to other AppleTalk nodes. The default zone is also where
new AppleTalk nodes will appear. If you do not set a default
zone, the first zone you create will be the default zone.
■
■
network number range. Select Net High and enter the upper
limit of the range.
Select the Seeding pop-up menu and choose the seeding
method for Netopia to use (see “Routers and seeding” on
page 6-5).
You have finished configuring EtherTalk Phase II.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup
6-11
LocalTalk Setup
The Netopia Router can function as a LocalTalk-to-EtherTalk router.
This means that a LocalTalk network can be connected to the
Netopia Router’s PhoneNET port.
Select LocalTalk Setup in the AppleTalk Setup screen and press
Return to the LocalTalk Routing Setup screen.
LocalTalk Routing Setup
LocalTalk Enabled:
LocalTalk Zone Name:
LocalTalk Net Number:
Seeding...:
On
Unnamed
0
Soft-Seeding
Use this screen to set up the LocalTalk Port Routing attributes.
■
■
If you are using LocalTalk with the Netopia Router, select
LocalTalk Enabled and make sure LocalTalk is set to On, which
is the default.
Select LocalTalk Zone Name and enter a new or existing zone
name.
Note: Your LocalTalk network may already have a zone and
network number in place. For Netopia’s LocalTalk port to be
part of your LocalTalk network, it must have a network number
and zone name that matches the values in use on the LocalTalk
network.
If another router is already present on the LocalTalk network
that you will be connecting to the Netopia Router, use the zone
name and network number used by that router for that
LocalTalk network. Otherwise, your LocalTalk network may
experience routing conflicts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-12
Reference Guide
As an alternative, you can set LocalTalk seeding to soft seeding
and let the Netopia Router receive the zone name and network
■
■
Select LocalTalk Network Number and enter the desired
network number.
Select Seeding. From the pop-up menu, choose the type of
seeding for the Netopia Router’s LocalTalk port to use (see
“Routers and seeding” on page 6-5).
You have finished configuring LocalTalk Setup.
AURP setup
To set up AURP, select AppleTalk Setup from the Network Protocols
screen. Select AURP Setup and press Return.
AURP Setup
AURP Enable:
On
Display/Change Partner...
Add Partner...
Delete Partner...
Enter Free Trade Zone Name:
Accept Connections From...
Anyone
No
Restrict Guests to Free Trade Zone:
Advanced Options...
AURP Allows you to connect remote AppleTalk Networks across IP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup
6-13
■
To activate AURP and enable connections to and from AURP
partners, select AURP Enable and toggle it to On.
Viewing AURP partners
■
To see a table of existing AURP partners, select Display/ Show
Partners and press Return.
Note: The Netopia Router can define a total of 32 AURP
partners.
Adding an AURP partner
■
To add a new AURP partner, select Add Partner and press
Return to go to the Add AURP Partner screen.
Add AURP Partner
Partner IP Address or Domain Name:
Initiate Connection:
No
No
Restrict to Free Trade Zone:
ADD PARTNER NOW
CANCEL
Enter Information about new Partner.
■
Select Partner IP Address or Domain Name and enter the new
AURP partner’s IP address. If you do not know the remote
network’s IP address, enter its domain name. Domain names
are the Internet addresses favored by people (for example,
chagall.arts.edu). Domain names are matched to the IP
addresses actually used by IP routers (for example,
163.7.8.202).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-14
Reference Guide
■
■
■
To initiate a connection with an AURP partner, select Initiate
Connection and toggle it to Yes. This will open a connection to
the remote AppleTalk network.
To restrict the new AURP partner’s access to your intranet,
select Restrict to Free Trade Zone and toggle it to Yes. See
“Restricting intranet access,” below.
To add the new AURP partner, select ADD PARTNER NOW. To
discard the new AURP partner, select CANCEL.
Modifying an AURP partner
■
To modify an AURP partner, select Display/ Change Partner in
the AURP Setup screen and press Return to display a table of
existing partners.
Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to select a partner, then
press Return to go to the Change AURP Partner screen.
Deleting an AURP partner
■
To delete an AURP partner, select Delete Partner in the AURP
Setup screen and press Return to display a table of existing
partners.
Use the Up and Down Arrow keys to select an AURP partner,
then press Return to delete it. Press the Escape key to exit
without deleting a partner.
Restricting intranet access
■
To restrict access to your Intranet by your AURP partners,
establish a free trade zone. By creating this zone for AURP
partners to access, you can confine all AURP traffic to and from
the AppleTalk nodes residing within the free trade zone.
Select Enter Free Trade Zone Name and enter the name of a
zone to handle all AURP traffic. This zone may be one that does
not yet exist.
■
To restrict AURP access to and from the free trade zone, select
Restrict Guests to Free Trade Zone and toggle it to Yes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup
6-15
Receiving AURP connections
■
To control the acceptance of incoming AURP tunnels, select
Accept Connections From and choose Anyone or Configured
Partners Only from the pop-up menu. If you choose Anyone, all
incoming AURP connections will be accepted.
The more secure option is Configured Partners Only, which
only accepts connections from recognized AURP partners (the
ones you have set up).
Configuring AURP Options
In the AURP Setup screen, select Advanced Options and go to the
AURP Options screen. Using AURP can cause a problem when two
networks, one local and one remote, have the same network
number. This may cause network routing ambiguities than can result
in routing errors.
AURP Options
Tickle Interval (HH:MM:SS):
Update Interval (HH:MM:SS):
00:00:00
00:00:30
Enable Network Number Remapping:
Yes
Remap into Range
From:
To:
4096
32768
Cluster Remote Networks:
No
No
Enable Hop-Count Reduction:
■
Select Tickle Interval (HH:MM:SS) and set the timer to
indicate how often a tickle or ‘are you still there’ packet will be
sent to the remote AppleTalk Network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-16
Reference Guide
The AURP tickle timer is a parameter that you can set anywhere
between 0 and 100 hours. This parameter tells the AURP
partners when to send out an AURP tickle packet. If this value
is set to 0, the Netopia Router will never send out a tickle
packet.
■
Select Update Interval (HH:MM:SS) and set the timer to
indicate how often a Routing Information Update (RI-Upd)
packet will be sent to the remote router.
The update timer is a parameter that you can set between 10
and 327270 seconds in 10-second increments. Values less
than 10 will be rounded to 10. Values greater than 327270 will
be rounded to 327270. Values in between 10 and 327270 will
be rounded to the nearest multiple of 10.
■
To enable network number remapping, select Enable Network
Number Remapping and toggle it to Yes.
You should enable network number remapping if you plan on
using AURP. With remapping, Netopia will substitute network
numbers not used by your network for the numbers of other
remote networks. These safe numbers will only be used by
local routers on your network; remote routers will not be aware
of the remapping.
When network number remapping is enabled, you must choose
a safe range of network numbers as a destination for the
remapping. A safe range of network numbers does not intersect
your local AppleTalk network’s range of network numbers.
■
■
To choose a destination range for the remapping, select From
under Remap into Range and enter a starting value. Then
select To and enter an ending value. Make sure the range you
choose is large enough to accommodate all expected incoming
AURP network numbers.
To improve the efficiency of remapping network numbers into a
safe range, select Cluster Remote Networks and toggle it to
Yes. This setting takes any number of remote networks being
remapped and causes them to be remapped into a continuous
range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AppleTalk Setup
6-17
■
To override the AppleTalk maximum limit of 15 hops, select
Enable Hop-Count Reduction and toggle it to Yes. Hosts on a
local AppleTalk network will then “see” AppleTalk destinations
across the IP tunnel as being only one hop away.
AppleTalk allows a packet up to 15 hops (going through 15
AppleTalk routers) to reach its destination. Packets that must
reach destinations more than 15 hops away will not succeed,
and tunneling from one large AppleTalk network to another
could exceed that limit. In that case, hop count reduction would
make that kind of packet transmission possible.
You have finished configuring AURP Setup.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-18
Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-1
Chapter 7
Security
protect its configuration screens and your local network from
strongly recommended that you use them.
This chapter is divided into five main sections:
■
blocking potential security holes.
■
Router’s configuration screens.
■
■
“Telnet access” on page 7-5, shows you how to control access
“About filters and filter sets,” beginning on page 7-6, and
“Working with IP filters and filter sets,” beginning on page 7-16,
have information on what filters are, how they work, how to
customize them, and how to use them in sets. For information
on IPX filters and filter sets, see “IPX filters,” beginning on
page 5-8.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Reference Guide
Suggested security measures
In addition to setting up user accounts, Telnet access, and filters
(all of which are covered later in this chapter), there are other
actions you can take to make the Netopia Router and your network
more secure:
■
If you will be using a PC Card modem for dial-up access through
a telephone line, keep the phone number secure and be sure to
set passwords to protect the configuration screens.
■
Change the SNMP community strings (or passwords). The
default community strings are universal and could easily be
known to a potential intruder.
■
■
Set the answer profile so it must match incoming calls to a
connection profile, if you are using a switched line and CallerID.
Where possible, insist on using PAP, CHAP, or secure
authentication token card to authenticate connections to and
from connection profiles.
■
■
When using AURP, accept connections only from configured
partners.
Configure the Netopia Router through the serial or PC card
console port to ensure that your communications cannot be
intercepted.
User accounts
When you first set up and configure the Netopia Router, no
passwords are required to access the configuration screens.
Anyone could tamper with the router’s configuration by simply
connecting it to a console.
However, by adding user accounts, you can protect the most
sensitive screens from unauthorized access. User accounts are
composed of name/ password combinations that can be given to
authorized users.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-3
Caution!
You are strongly encouraged to add protection to the configuration
screens. Unprotected screens could allow an unauthorized user to
compromise the operation of your entire network.
The following screens can be protected with a name/ password
combination:
■
■
■
■
■
Main Menu
Easy Setup
Advanced Configuration
Security Options (password only)
Statistics, Utilities, Tests
Once user accounts are created, users who attempt to access
protected screens will be challenged. Users who enter an incorrect
name or password are returned to the Main Menu or to a screen
requesting a name/ password combination to access the Main
Menu.
To set up user accounts, select Security in the Main Menu and go
to the Security Options screen.
Security Options
Show Users...
Add User...
Delete User...
Password for This Screen (11 chars max):
Require Name and Password to Log On:
No
Deny Telnet Access to SNMP Screens:
Block Telnet Console Access:
No
No
Web Server Disabled (config):
No
Set up configuration access options here.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Reference Guide
Protecting the Security Options screen
The first screen you should protect is the Security Options screen,
because it controls access to the configuration screens. Access to
the Security Options screen can be protected with a password.
Select Password To Visit This Screen in the Security Options
screen and enter a password. Make sure this password is secure
and is different from any of the user account passwords.
Protecting the configuration screens
You can protect the configuration screens with user accounts. You
can administer the accounts from the Security Options screen.
A single user account allows access to the Easy Setup, Advanced
Configuration, and Statistics, Utilities, Tests screens. You can
create up to four accounts.
To display a view-only list of user accounts, select Show Users in
the Security Options screen.
To add a new user account, select Add User in the Security Options
screen and press Return to go to the Add Name With Write Access
screen.
Add Name With Write Access
Enter Name:
Enter Password (11 characters max):
ADD NAME/PASSWORD NOW
CANCEL
Follow these steps to configure the new account:
1. Select Enter Name and enter a descriptive name (for example,
the user’s first name).
2. Select Enter Password and enter a password.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-5
3. To accept the new name/ password combination, select ADD
NAME/ PASSWORD NOW. To exit the Add Name With Write
Access screen without saving the new account, select CANCEL.
Note: The Web server uses only the first configured
Name/ Password pair for configuration access.
To delete a user account, select Delete User to display a list of
accounts. Select an account from the list and press Return to
delete it. To exit the list without deleting the selected account, press
the Escape key.
Protecting the Main Menu
The name/ password combinations you created to protect the
individual configuration screens can be extended to the Main Menu.
Select Require Name and Password to Log On in the Security
Options screen and toggle it to Yes.
Telnet access
Telnet is a TCP/ IP service that allows remote terminals to access
hosts on an IP network. The Netopia Router supports Telnet access
to its configuration screens.
Caution!
You should consider restricting Telnet access to the Netopia Router
if you suspect there is a chance of tampering.
To restrict Telnet access, select Security in the Main Menu and go
to the Security Options screen. There are two levels of Telnet
restriction available:
To restrict Telnet access to the SNMP screens, select Deny Telnet
Access to SNMP Screens and toggle it to Yes. (See “SNMP traps”
on page 9-20.)
To restrict Telnet access to all of the configuration screens, select
Block Telnet Console Access and toggle it to Yes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
Reference Guide
About filters and filter sets
Security should be a high priority for anyone administering a network
connected to the Internet. Using packet filters to control network
communications can greatly improve your network’s security.
The Netopia Router’s packet filters are designed to provide security
for the Internet connections made to and from your network. You
can customize the router’s filter sets for a variety of packet filtering
applications. Typically, you use filters to selectively admit or refuse
TCP/ IP connections from certain remote networks and specific
hosts. You will also use filters to screen particular types of
connections. This is commonly called firewalling your network.
Before creating filter sets, you should read the next few sections to
learn more about how these powerful security tools work.
What’s a filter and what’s a filter set?
A filter is a rule that lets you specify what sort of data can flow in
and out of your network. A particular filter can either be an input
filter—one that is used on data (packets) coming in to your network
from the Internet—or an output filter—one that is used on data
(packets) going out from your network to the Internet.
A filter set is a group of filters that work together to check incoming
or outgoing data. A filter set can consist of a combination of input
and output filters.
How filter sets work
A filter set acts like a team of customs inspectors. Each filter is an
inspector through which incoming and outgoing packages must
pass. The inspectors work as a team, but each inspects every
package individually.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-7
Each inspector has a specific task. One inspector’s task may be to
examine the destination address of all outgoing packages. That
inspector looks for a certain destination—which could be as specific
as a street address or as broad as an entire country—and checks
each package’s destination address to see if it matches that
destination.
FROM:
FROM:
FROM:
TO:
TO:
TO:
A filter inspects data packets like a customs inspector scrutinizing packages.
Filter priority
Continuing the customs inspectors analogy, imagine the inspectors
lined up to examine a package. If the package matches the first
inspector’s criteria, the package is either rejected or passed on to
its destination, depending on the first inspector’s particular orders.
In this case, the package is never seen by the remaining inspectors.
If the package does not match the first inspector’s criteria, it goes
to the second inspector, and so on. You can see that the order of
the inspectors in the line is very important.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-8
Reference Guide
For example, let’s say the first inspector’s orders are to send along
all packages that come from Rome, and the second inspector’s
orders are to reject all packages that come from France. If a
package arrives from Rome, the first inspector sends it along
without allowing the second inspector to see it. A package from
Paris is ignored by the first inspector, rejected by the second
inspector, and never seen by the others. A package from London is
ignored by the first two inspectors, and so it’s seen by the third
inspector.
packet
first
filter
no
match?
send
to next
filter
In the same way, filter sets apply their filters in a particular order.
The first filter applied can pass or discard a packet before that
packet ever reaches any of the other filters. If the first filter can
neither pass nor discard the packet (because it cannot match any
criteria), the second filter has a chance to pass or reject it, and so
on. Because of this hierarchical structure, each filter is said to have
a priority. The first filter has the highest priority, and the last filter
has the lowest priority.
yes
pass or
discard?
discard
(delete)
pass
You use filter sets by linking them to particular connection profiles
and the answer profile. When you create a connection profile or edit
to network
To learn how to link a filter set to a connection profile, see “Adding a
Connection Profile” on page 2-16 or “Changing a Connection
Profile” on page 2-15.
To learn how to link a filter set to the answer profile, see “How the
default profile works for a permanent circuit” on page 2-45, or “How
the default profile works for a permanent circuit” on page 2-45.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-9
How individual filters work
As described above, a filter applies criteria to an IP packet and then
takes one of three actions:
A filter’s actions
■
■
■
Passes the packet to the local or remote network
Blocks (discards) the packet
Ignores the packet
A filter passes or blocks a packet only if it finds a match after
applying its criteria. When no match occurs, the filter ignores the
packet.
The criteria are based on information contained in the packets. A
filter is simply a rule that prescribes certain actions based on
certain conditions. For example, the following rule qualifies as a
filter:
A filtering rule
Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host
199.211.211.17.
This rule applies to Telnet packets that come from a host with the IP
address 199.211.211.17. If a match occurs, the packet is blocked.
Here is what this rule looks like when implemented as a filter on the
Netopia Router:
+-#--Source IP Addr--Dest IP Addr-----Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
1 199.211.211.17
0.0.0.0
TCP
23
Yes No
To understand this particular filter, look at the parts of a filter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-10
Reference Guide
Parts of a filter
A filter consists of criteria based on packet attributes. A typical filter
can match a packet on any one of the following attributes:
■
■
■
The source IP address (where the packet was sent from)
The destination IP address (where the packet is going)
The type of higher-layer Internet protocol the packet is carrying,
such as TCP or UDP
Port numbers
A filter can also match a packet’s port number attributes, but only if
the filter’s protocol type is set to TCP or UDP, since only those
protocols use port numbers. The filter can be configured to match
the following:
■
The source port number (the port on the sending host that
originated the packet)
■
The destination port number (the port on the receiving host
that the packet is destined for)
By matching on a port number, a filter can be applied to selected
TCP or UDP services, such as Telnet, FTP, and World Wide Web. The
tables below show a few common services and their associated
port numbers..
Internet service
FTP
TCP port
Internet service
Finger
TCP port
20/ 21
23
79
80
Telnet
World Wide Web
News
SMTP (mail)
Gopher
25
144
513
70
rlogin
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-11
Internet service
Who Is
UDP port
Internet service
UDP port
43
AppleTalk Routing
Maintenance (at-rtmp)
202
202
World Wide Web
80
AppleTalk Name Binding
(at-nbp)
SNMP
TFTP
161
69
AURP (AppleTalk)
who
387
513
Port number comparisons
A filter can also use a comparison option to evaluate a packet’s
source or destination port number. The comparison options are:
No Compare: No comparison of the port number specified in the
filter with the packet’s port number.
Not Equal To: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number
cannot equal the port number specified in the filter.
Less Than: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number must
be less than the port number specified in the filter.
Less Than or Equal: For the filter to match, the packet’s port
number must be less than or equal to the port number specified in
the filter.
Equal: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number must equal
the port number specified in the filter.
Greater Than: For the filter to match, the packet’s port number
must be greater than the port number specified in the filter.
Greater Than or Equal: For the filter to match, the packet’s port
number must be greater than or equal to the port number specified
in the filter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-12
Reference Guide
Other filter attributes
There are three other attributes to each filter:
■
■
■
The filter’s order (i.e., priority) in the filter set
Whether the filter is currently active
Whether the filter is set to pass (forward) packets or to block
(discard) packets
Putting the parts together
When you display a filter set, its filters are displayed as rows in a
table:
+-#---Source IP Addr---Dest IP Addr----Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd-+
| 1
|
192.211.211.17
0.0.0.0
TCP
0
23
Yes No |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
The table’s columns correspond to each filter’s attributes:
#: The filter’s priority in the set. Filter number 1, with the highest
priority, is first in the table.
Source IP Addr: The packet source IP address to match.
Dest IP Addr: The packet destination IP address to match.
Proto: The protocol to match. This can be entered as a number (see
the table below) or as TCP or UDP if using those protocols.
Protocol
Number to use
Full name
N/ A
ICMP
TCP
0
1
Ignores protocol type
Internet Control Message Protocol
Transmission Control Protocol
User Datagram Protocol
6
UDP
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-13
Src. Port: The source port to match. This is the port on the sending
host that originated the packet.
D. Port: The destination port to match. This is the port on the
receiving host for which the packet is intended.
On?: Displays Yes when the filter is in effect or No when it is not.
Fwd: Shows whether the filter forwards (Yes) a packet or discards
(No) it when there’s a match.
Filtering example #1
Returning to our filtering rule example from above (see page 7-9),
look at how a rule is translated into a filter. Start with the rule, then
fill in the filter’s attributes:
1. The rule you want to implement as a filter is:
Block all Telnet attempts that originate from the remote host
199.211.211.17.
2. The host 199.211.211.17 is the source of the Telnet packets
you want to block, while the destination address is any IP
address. How these IP addresses are masked determines what
the final match will be, although the mask is not displayed in
the table that displays the filter sets (you set it when you create
the filter). In fact, since the mask for the destination IP address
is 0.0.0.0, the address for Dest IP Addr could have been
anything. The mask for Source IP Addr must be
255.255.255.255 since an exact match is desired.
■
■
■
■
Source IP Addr = 199.211.211.17
Dest IP Addr = 0.0.0.0
Destination IP address mask = 0.0.0.0
Note: To learn about IP addresses and masks, see Appendix B,
“Understanding IP Addressing.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-14
Reference Guide
3. Using the tables on page 7-10, find the destination port and
protocol numbers (the local Telnet port):
■
■
Proto = TCP (or 6)
D. Port = 23
4. The filter should be enabled and instructed to block the Telnet
packets containing the source address shown in step 2:
■
■
On? = Yes
Fwd = No
This four-step process is how we produced the following filter from
the original rule:
+-#--Source IP Addr--Dest IP Addr-----Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
1 199.211.211.17
0.0.0.0
TCP
23
Yes No
Filtering example #2
Suppose a filter is configured to block all incoming IP packets with
the source IP address of 200.233.14.0, regardless of the type of
connection or its destination. The filter would look like this:
+-#--Source IP Addr--Dest IP Addr-----Proto-Src.Port-D.Port--On?-Fwd
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
1 200.233.14.0
0.0.0.0
0
Yes No
This filter blocks any packets coming from a remote network with
the IP network address 200.233.14.0. The 0 at the end of the
address signifies any host on the class C IP network 200.233.14.0.
If, for example, the filter is applied to a packet with the source IP
address 200.233.14.5, it will block it.
In this case, the mask, which does not appear in the table, must be
set to 255.255.255.0. This way, all packets with a source address
of 200.233.14.x will be matched correctly, no matter what the final
address byte is.
Note: The protocol attribute for this filter is 0 by default. This tells
the filter to ignore the IP protocol or type of IP packet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-15
Design guidelines
Careful thought should go into designing a new filter set. You should
consider the following guidelines:
■
Be sure the filter set’s overall purpose is clear from the
beginning. A vague purpose can lead to a faulty set, and that
can actually make your network less secure.
■
■
Be sure each individual filter’s purpose is clear.
Determine how filter priority will affect the set’s actions. Test
the set (on paper) by determining how the filters would respond
to a number of different hypothetical packets.
■
Consider the combined effect of the filters. If every filter in a
set fails to match on a particular packet, the packet is:
■
passed if all the filters are configured to discard (not for-
ward).
■
■
discarded if all the filters are configured to pass (forward).
discarded if the set contains a combination of pass and
discard filters.
Disadvantages of filters
Although using filter sets can greatly enhance network security,
there are disadvantages:
■
Filters are complex. Combining them in filter sets introduces
subtle interactions, increasing the likelihood of implementation
errors.
■
Enabling a large number of filters can have a negative impact
on performance. Processing of packets will take longer if they
have to go through many checkpoints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-16
Reference Guide
■
Too much reliance on packet filters can cause too little reliance
on other security methods. Filter sets are not a substitute for
password protection, effective safeguarding of passwords,
caller ID, the “must match” option in the answer profile, PAP or
CHAP in connection profiles, callback, and general awareness
of how your network may be vulnerable.
An approach to using filters
The ultimate goal of network security is to prevent unauthorized
access to the network without compromising authorized access.
Using filter sets is part of reaching that goal.
Each filter set you design will be based on one of the following
approaches:
■
■
That which is not expressly prohibited is permitted.
That which is not expressly permitted is prohibited.
It is strongly recommended that you take the latter, and safer,
Working with IP filters and filter sets
This section covers IP filters and filter sets. For working with IPX
filters and filter sets, see “IPX filters,” beginning on page 5-8.
IP
Filter
Sets
Advanced
Config.
Main
Menu
To work with filters and filter sets, begin by accessing the filter set
screens.
Note: Make sure you understand how filters work before attempting
to use them. Read the section “About filters and filter sets,”
beginning on page 7-6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-17
IP Filter Sets
Display/Change IP Filter Set...
Add IP Filter Set...
Delete IP Filter Set...
Return/Enter to configure and add a new Filter Set.
Set Up IP Filter Sets (Firewalls) from this and the following Menus.
The basic procedure for creating and maintaining filter sets is as
follows:
1. Add a new filter set.
2. Create the filters for the new filter set.
3. View, change, or delete individual filters and filter sets.
The sections below explain how to execute these steps.
Adding a filter set
You can create up to eight different custom filter sets. Each filter set
can contain up to 16 output filters and up to 16 input filters.
To add a new filter set, select Add IP Filter Set in the IP Filter Sets
screen and press Return to go to the Add Filter Set screen.
Note: There are two groups of items in the Add Filter Set screen,
one for input filters and one for output filters. The two groups work
in essentially the same way, as you’ll see below.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-18
Reference Guide
Add IP Filter Set
Filter Set Name:
Filter Set 2
Display/Change Input Filter...
Add Input Filter...
Delete Input Filter...
Display/Change Output Filter...
Add Output Filter...
Delete Output Filter...
ADD FILTER SET
CANCEL
Configure the Filter Set name and its associated Filters.
Naming a new filter set
All new filter sets have a default name. The first filter set you add will
enter a new name for the filter set.
To save the filter set, select ADD FILTER SET. The saved filter set is
empty (contains no filters), but you can return to it later to add filters
(see “Modifying filter sets” on page 7-24). Or you can add filters to
your new set before saving it (see “Adding filters to a filter set” on
page 7-20).
Select CANCEL to leave the Add Filter Set screen without saving the
new filter set and return to the Filter Sets screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-19
Input and output filters—source and destination
There are two kinds of filters you can add to a filter set: input and
output. Input filters check packets received from the Internet,
destined for your network. Output filters check packets transmitted
from your network to the Internet.
packet
input filter
LAN
WAN
packet
output filter
The Netopia Router
Packets in the Netopia Router pass through an input filter if they originate in the
WAN and through an output filter if they’re being sent out to the WAN.
The process for adding input and output filters is exactly the same.
The main difference between the two involves their reference to
source and destination. From the perspective of an input filter, your
local network is the destination of the packets it checks, and the
remote network is their source. From the perspective of an output
filter, your local network is the source of the packets, and the remote
network is their destination.
Type of filter
“source” means
“destination” means
Input filter
the remote network
the local network
the local network
Output filter
the remote network
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-20
Reference Guide
Adding filters to a filter set
In this section you’ll learn how to add an input filter to a filter set.
Adding an output filter works exactly the same way, providing you keep
the different source and destination perspectives in mind.
To add an input filter, select Add Input Filter in the Add IP Filter Set
screen and go to the Add Filter screen. (Select Add Output Filter to
add an output filter.)
Add Filter
Enabled:
Forward:
No
No
Source IP Address:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Source IP Address Mask:
Dest. IP Address:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address Mask:
Protocol Type:
0
Source Port Compare...
Source Port ID:
No Compare
0
Dest. Port Compare...
Dest. Port ID:
No Compare
0
ADD THIS FILTER NOW
CANCEL
Enter the IP specific information for this filter.
1. To make the filter active in the filter set, select Enabled and
toggle it to Yes. If Enabled is toggled to No, the filter can still exist
in the filter set, but it will have no effect.
2. If you want the filter to forward packets that match its criteria to
the destination IP address, select Forward and toggle it to Yes. If
Forward is toggled to No, packets matching the filter’s criteria will
be discarded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-21
3. Select Source IP Address and enter the source IP address this
filter will match on. You can enter a subnet or a host address.
4. Select Source IP Address Mask and enter a mask for the source
IP address. This allows you to further modify the way the filter will
match on the source address. Enter 0.0.0.0 to force the filter to
match on all source IP addresses, or enter 255.255.255.255 to
match the source IP address exclusively.
5. Select Dest. IP Address and enter the destination IP address this
filter will match on. You can enter a subnet or a host address.
destination IP address. This allows you to further modify the way
the filter will match on the destination address. Enter 0.0.0.0 to
force the filter to match on all destination IP addresses.
7. Select Protocol Type and enter ICMP, TCP, UDP, Any, or the
number of another IP transport protocol (see the table on
page 7-12).
comparison that you configure in steps 8 and 9 will appear. These
settings only take effect if the Protocol Type is TCP or UDP.
8. Select Source Port Compare and choose a comparison method
Source Port ID and enter the actual source port number to match
on (see the table on page 7-10).
9. Select Dest. Port Compare and choose a comparison method for
the filter to use on a packet’s destination port number. Then
select Dest. Port ID and enter the actual destination port number
to match on (see the table on page 7-10).
10. When you are finished configuring the filter, select ADD THIS
FILTER NOW to save the filter in the filter set. Select CANCEL to
discard the filter.
TCP filter. You can increase security on connections using TCP by
filtering by protocol type and matching established TCP connections
only. With this filter attached to an active connection profile, no TCP
connections can be established from outside the firewall, increasing
network security.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-22
Reference Guide
You can add a TCP filter to a filter set with the following steps:
1. In the Add Filter screen, toggle the Enabled field to Yes.
2. Select Forward and toggle it to Yes.
3. Select the Protocol Type field and type in TCP. Then press
Return.
4. In the last field that appears, Established TCP Conns. Only, tog-
gle the entry to Yes and press Return. This new field configures
the filter to match TCP packets for established TCP connections
only.
5. Select ADD THIS FILTER NOW and press Return.
With this filter in effect, users from outside the firewall cannot initiate
TCP connections to devices on your network, including your FTP
server, Web server, and Telnet. To provide limited access to your
network, set up a filter to forward traffic to a specific port, such as the
FTP server port, Web server port, or Telnet port, and to a specific IP
address and mask, in addition to restricting all outside TCP
connections.
Viewing filters
To display a view-only table of input (output) filters, select
Display/ Change Input Filters (Display/ Change Output Filters) in the
Add IP Filter Set screen.
Modifying filters
Change Output Filter) in the Add IP Filter Set screen to display a table
of filters.
Select a filter from the table and press Return to go to the Change
Filter screen. The parameters in this screen are the same as the ones
in the Add Filter screen (see “Adding filters to a filter set” on
page 7-20).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-23
Change Filter
Enabled:
Forward:
No
No
Source IP Address:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Source IP Address Mask:
Dest. IP Address:
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address Mask:
Protocol Type:
0
Source Port Compare...
Source Port ID:
No Compare
0
Dest. Port Compare...
Dest. Port ID:
No Compare
0
Enter the IP specific information for this filter.
Deleting filters
To delete a filter, select Delete Input Filter (Delete Output Filter) in
the Add Filter Set screen to display a table of filters.
Select the filter from the table and press Return to delete it. Press the
Escape key to exit the table without deleting the filter.
Viewing filter sets
To display a view-only list of filter sets, select Display/ Change Filter
Sets in the IP Filter Sets screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-24
Reference Guide
Modifying filter sets
To modify a filter set, select Display/ Change Filter Set in the Filter
Sets screen to display a list of filter sets.
Select a filter set from the list and press Return to go to the Change IP
Filter Set screen. The items in this screen are the same as the ones
in the Add Filter screen (see “Adding filters to a filter set” on
page 7-20).
Change IP Filter Set
Filter Set Name:
Basic Firewall
Display/Change Input Filter...
Add Input Filter...
Delete Input Filter...
Display/Change Output Filter...
Add Output Filter...
Delete Output Filter...
Deleting a filter set
Note: If you delete a filter set, all of the filters it contains are deleted
as well. To reuse any of these filters in another set, you’ll have to note
their configuration before deleting the current filter set and then
recreate them.
To delete a filter set, select Delete Filter Set in the IP Filter Sets
screen to display a list of filter sets.
Select a filter set from the list and press Return to delete it. Press the
Escape key to exit the list without deleting the filter set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-25
This section contains the settings for a filter set, called Basic Firewall,
which is part of the Netopia Router’s factory configuration. You can
add Basic Firewall to your connection profiles or the answer profile
(see “Connection profiles for ISDN and Leased lines” on page 2-13
and “Default profile” on page 2-39).
Basic Firewall blocks undesirable traffic originating from the WAN (in
most cases, the Internet), but passes all traffic originating from the
LAN. It follows the conservative “that which is not expressly permitted
is prohibited” approach: unless an incoming packet expressly
matches one of the constituent input filters, it will not be forwarded to
the LAN.
The five input filters and one output filter that make up Basic Firewall
are shown in the table below.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-26
Reference Guide
Input filter Input filter Input filter Input filter Input filter
Output
filter 1
Setting
Enabled
1
2
3
4
5
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Forward
Source IP
address
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Source IP
address mask
Dest. IP
address
Dest. IP
address mask
0.0.0.0
TCP
0.0.0.0
TCP
0.0.0.0
ICMP
N/ A
0.0.0.0
TCP
0.0.0.0
UDP
0.0.0.0
0
Protocol type
Source port
comparison
No
Compare
No
Compare
No
Compare
No
Compare
N/ A
N/ A
N/ A
N/ A
Source port ID
0
0
N/ A
0
0
Dest. port
comparison
Greater
Than
Greater
Than
Equal
2000
Equal
6000
N/ A
Dest. port ID
N/ A
1023
1023
Basic Firewall’s filters play the following roles.
Input filters 1 and 2: These block WAN-originated OpenWindows and
X-Windows sessions. Service origination requests for these protocols
use ports 2000 and 6000, respectively. Since these are greater than
1023, OpenWindows and X-Windows traffic would otherwise be
allowed by input filter 4. Input filters 1 and 2 must precede input filter
4; otherwise they would have no effect as filter 4 would have already
passed OpenWindows and X-Windows traffic.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-27
Input filter 3: This filter explicitly passes all WAN-originated ICMP
traffic to permit devices on the WAN to ping devices on the LAN. Ping
is an Internet service that is useful for diagnostic purposes.
Input filters 4 and 5: These filters pass all TCP and UDP traffic,
respectively, when the destination port is greater than 1023. This type
of traffic generally does not allow a remote host to connect to the LAN
using one of the potentially intrusive Internet services, such as Telnet,
FTP, and WWW.
Output filter 1: This filter passes all outgoing traffic to make sure that
no outgoing connections from the LAN are blocked.
Basic Firewall is suitable for a LAN containing only client hosts that
wish to access servers on the WAN, not for a LAN containing servers
strategy is to explicitly pass WAN-originated TCP and UDP traffic to
ports greater than 1023. Ports lower than 1024 are the service
origination ports for various Internet services such as FTP, Telnet, and
the World Wide Web (WWW).
A more complicated filter set would be required to provide WAN
access to a LAN-based server. See “Possible modifications,” below,
for ways to allow remote hosts to use services provided by servers on
the LAN.
Possible modifications
You can modify the sample filter set Basic Firewall to allow incoming
traffic using the examples below. These modifications are not
intended to be combined. Each modification is to be the only one used
with Basic Firewall.
The results of combining filter set modifications can be difficult to
predict. It is recommended that you take special care if making more
than one modification to the sample filter set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-28
Reference Guide
Trusted host. To allow unlimited access by a trusted remote host with
the IP address a.b.c.d (corresponding to a numbered IP address such
as 163.176.8.243), insert the following input filter ahead of the
current input filter 1:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Enabled: Yes
Forward: Yes
Source IP Address: a.b.c.d
Source IP Address Mask: 255.255.255.255
Dest. IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address Mask: 0.0.0.0
Protocol Type: 0
Trusted subnet. To allow unlimited access by a trusted remote subnet
with subnet address a.b.c.d (corresponding to a numbered IP address
such as 163.176.8.0) and subnet mask e.f.g.h (corresponding to a
numbered IP mask such as 255.255.255.0), insert the following
input filter ahead of the current input filter 1:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Enabled: Yes
Forward: Yes
Source IP Address: a.b.c.d
Source IP Address Mask: e.f.g.h
Dest. IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address Mask: 0.0.0.0
Protocol Type: 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
7-29
FTP sessions. To allow WAN-originated FTP sessions to a LAN-based
FTP server with the IP address a.b.c.d (corresponding to a numbered
IP address such as 163.176.8.243), insert the following input filter
ahead of the current input filter 1:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Enabled: Yes
Forward: Yes
Source IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Source IP Address Mask: 0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address: a.b.c.d
Dest. IP Address Mask: 255.255.255.255
Protocol Type: TCP
Source Port Comparison: No Compare
Source Port ID: 0
Dest. Port Comparison: Equal
Dest. Port ID: 21
Note: A similar filter could be used to permit Telnet or WWW access.
Set the Dest. Port ID to 23 for Telnet or 80 for WWW.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-30
Reference Guide
AURP tunnel. To allow an AURP tunnel between a remote AURP router
with the IP address a.b.c.d (corresponding to a numbered IP address
such as 163.176.8.243) and a local AURP router (including the
Netopia Router itself), insert the following input filter ahead of the
current input filter 1:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Enabled: Yes
Forward: Yes
Source IP Address: a.b.c.d
Source IP Address Mask: 255.255.255.255
Dest. IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Dest. IP Address Mask: 0.0.0.0
Protocol Type: UDP
Source Port Comparison: Equal
Source Port ID: 387
Dest. Port Comparison: Equal
Dest. Port ID: 387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-1
Chapter 8
Token Security Authentication
This chapter discusses how to configure and use security
authentication on the Netopia Router.
Note: The security authentication feature only applies to Netopia
Router models connecting over a dial-up ISDN line using the
PPP-PAP-TOKEN or PPP-CACHE-TOKEN authentication protocol.
If you will not be using this feature, you can skip this chapter.
Securing network environments
Unauthorized tampering or theft of information on internal networks
causes serious ramifications, given the reliance on information
systems. Network abuse is a serious problem, complicated by the
difficulty in detecting the source of the abuses. An unauthorized
user can gain access to networks and copy information without
leaving a trace.
Password protection is one solution, but static passwords are often
insecure. They can be compromised, allowing unauthorized users
to disguise themselves as authorized users and enter supposedly
secure systems. However, a company called Security Dynamics™
has patented a security authentication technology to increase
network security.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Reference Guide
SecurID is a two-factor authentication process to protect against
unauthorized access. This dynamic user authentication produces a
randomly-generated security code mechanism that changes every
60 seconds. At login, authorized users enter their password and
the code displayed on their SecurID token card. While a password
may be compromised, the constantly changing access code, which
requires the token card during system use, bars unauthorized users
from entering the network.
Using the SecurID token card
Each SecurID token card is programmed with an algorithm that
ensures every code displayed is valid only for that user at that
particular time. The token card has a display that authorizes the
individual user access to the computer. Through this authentication
system, the user’s identity is verified when the correct password
and current code are entered from the user’s token.
Personal identification number (PIN)
The user’s password is called a personal identification number, or
PIN. The user enters the secret PIN from a console connection,
followed by the current code displayed on the token card. Then the
access control module must authenticate the token’s unique code
in combination with the user’s secret PIN before access is granted.
Key Security Authentication Features of the
Netopia Router
As a remote device, the Netopia Router offers client/ calling side
security authentication. This feature allows the Netopia Router to
call a server router and perform security card authentication. The
router of the called server must have access to a server with ACE
software loaded on it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Token Security Authentication
8-3
To perform security card authentication, each user must have a
security authentication token card and a PIN. In addition, the user’s
identifying information must reside on the remote ACE servers for
authentication negotiation to properly take place.
The Netopia Router supports the following user configurations for
security authentication:
■
■
Single user, calling a single destination (single session)
Single user, calling multiple destinations (two simultaneous
and separate sessions)
■
■
Multiple users, calling a single destination (single session)
Multiple users, calling multiple destinations (two simultaneous
and separate sessions
Security authentication components
To properly identify and authenticate an authorized user, the
following are required:
■
■
■
A secret personal identification number (PIN) for each user.
A security authentication token card.
A Security Access Control Module (ACM).
Note: The Netopia Router currently only supports Ascend routers
as ACMs.
■
An external Netopia Router calling into a designated server. For
example, a telecommuter dialing into a remote site from a
Netopia Router interested in accessing personal email or file
sharing services.
Note: The Netopia Router does not include a security
authentication token card.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Reference Guide
Configuring the Netopia Router for security authentication
To configure the Netopia Router to support security authentication,
select an authentication method and set up a designated
connection profile from the Advanced Configuration screen or your
first connection profile from Easy Setup.
1. From the WAN Setup menu, select PPP/ MP Options.
PPP/MP Options
Data Compression...
+----------------+
+----------------+
Send Authentication...
| None
|
|
|
|
|
| PAP
Send User Name:
Send Password:
| CHAP
| PAP-TOKEN
| CACHE-TOKEN
Receive User Name:
Receive Password:
+----------------+
B-Channel Usage...
BAP/BACP Enabled:
Maximum Packet Size:
Dynamic
Yes
1500
For PAP-TOKEN or CACHE-TOKEN -- Password protection is used. Secure
Card needed to authenticate.
2. Select Send Authentication and press Return. From the pop-up
menu, highlight PAP-TOKEN or CACHE-TOKEN. Your network
administrator or the remote network administrator will tell you
which method to select.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Token Security Authentication
8-5
If you select PAP-TOKEN, select Send User Name and enter a
name for your Netopia Router. You will not need to enter a
Send Password for PAP-TOKEN. Press Return.
If you select CACHE-TOKEN, select Send User Name and enter
a name for your Netopia Router. Then, select Send Password
and enter a secret name or number. Press Return.
3. Set up a connection profile to use with your authentication
method. See Chapter 2, for information on setting up a
connection profile.
Note: If you are setting up your first connection profile, you can also
enter your authentication information in the Easy Setup Connection
Profile screen.
Initiating a connection call using security authentication
There are two ways to initiate a connection call using security
authentication. You can either establish a dial-on-demand (DOD)
connection or establish a manual connection.
Establishing a dial-on-demand (DOD)
connection call
To establish a connection call using DOD, select Statistics, Utilities,
Tests from the Main Menu and press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Reference Guide
Statistics, Utilities, Tests
Statistics
Utilities
General Statistics...
Event Histories...
Routing Tables...
Date and Time...
Establish WAN Connection...
Disconnect WAN Connection...
Ping...
Upgrade Feature Set...
Restart System...
Revert to Factory Defaults...
Secure Authentication Monitor...
Tests
ISDN Switch Loopback Test...
1. Select Secure Authentication Monitor and press Return. The
Secure Authentication Monitor screen appears.
Note: The Secure Authentication Monitor field will remain hidden if
PAP-TOKEN or CACHE-TOKEN is not the selected authentication
method in the connection profile.
2. Wait for the call to initiate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Token Security Authentication
8-7
Secure Authentication Monitor
Current ISDN Connection Status
Profile Name---State---%Use---Remote Address---Est.---More Info---
Status --- Passcode Required
For Connection Profile: Easy Setup Profile
0-Challenge: Enter PASSCODE:
Passcode:
123412345678
3. From the fields that appear, select Enter PASSCODE and press
Return. Enter your PIN and the code displayed on your security
authentication token card LED screen.
4. Once the call is established, and you enter your passcode as
prompted, PPP negotiation will continue. If the call is specified
for PAP-TOKEN, and the session involves more than one
B-channel, you will be prompted for each B-channel being
brought up.
Note: When using CACHE-TOKEN, your passcode is valid for a time
interval determined by the network administrator. When this time
interval expires, you must provide a new passcode for the call
negotiation.
When using PAP-TOKEN for a 2B-Channel call, your passcode is valid
for one call negotiation. For a second call negotiation, you must
enter the next passcode provided by the security authentication
token card every 60 seconds.
You will be able to access information at the remote site that you
are connecting to once authentication is successfully completed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
Reference Guide
Establishing a manual connection call
To establish a Manual connection call, select the Statistic, Utilities,
Tests from the Main Menu and press Return.
1. Select Establish WAN Connection from the Statistics, Utilities,
Tests screen and press Return. The Establish WAN
Connection screen displays a table of all of the connection
profiles you have defined. Highlight the connection profile you
wish to manually call. Press Return to initiate the call.
Call Status
Profile Name -- Easy Setup Profile
Connection State -- Dialing
Channel B1 State -- Acquiring
Channel B2 State --
0-Challenge: Enter PASSCODE:
Passcode:
123412345678
Hit ESCAPE/RETURN/ENTER to return to previous menu.
2. From the fields that appear, select Enter PASSCODE and press
Return. Enter your PIN and the code displayed on your security
authentication token card LED screen.
3. Once the call is established, and you enter your passcode as
prompted, PPP negotiation will continue. If the call is specified
for PAP-TOKEN, and the session involves more than one
B-channel, you will be prompted for each B-channel being
brought up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Token Security Authentication
8-9
Note: When using CACHE-TOKEN, your passcode is valid for a time
interval determined by the network administrator. When this time
interval expires, you must provide a new passcode for the call
negotiation.
When using PAP-TOKEN for a 2B-Channel call, your passcode is valid
for one call negotiation. For a second call negotiation, you must
enter the next passcode provided by the security authentication
token card every 60 seconds.
You will be able to access information at the remote site that you
are connecting to once authentication is successfully completed.
Troubleshooting
If the security authentication process did not negotiate properly,
check for the following:
■
If your security authentication token card is providing you with a
passcode but is being rejected by the Radius server, your token
card may be out of sync with the Radius server, or the server is
not correctly configured to accept your account information.
■
If your security authentication token card is not providing you
with a passcode, the card may have expired or either the
Netopia Router or Radius server is misconfigured.
For further information on how to troubleshoot these kinds of
problems, contact the manufacturer of your security authentication
software and hardware, or contact Farallon Technical Support.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10
Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-1
Chapter 9
Monitoring Tools
This chapter discusses the Netopia Router’s device and network
monitoring tools. These tools can provide statistical information,
report on current network status, record events, and help in
diagnosing and locating problems.
Status overview
You can get a useful, overall status report from the Netopia Router
in the Quick View screen. To go to the Quick View screen, select
Quick View in the Main Menu.
Main
Menu
Quick View
The Quick View screen has three status sections:
■
■
■
General status
Current Status
LED Status
The status sections vary according to the interface of your Netopia
Router.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Reference Guide
General Status
All interfaces
Quick View
Ethernet Address - 00-00-c5-ff-60-8d Current Date - 5/30/97 03:49:52PM
Firmware Version - 3.0
WAN Line Rate - 64 Kbps
IP Address - 163.176.8.128
AppleTalk ET Address - 33051:150
AppleTalk LT Address - 33050:149
IPX Network Address - 00000000
Ethernet Address: The Netopia Router’s hardware address.
Firmware Version: The version of the software that controls the
Netopia Router. This number is useful if you call Farallon technical
support and are asked for the firmware version running on the
Menu.
WAN Line Rate: The rate of the leased line connection. This field
appears only on permanent leased lines.
Current Date: The current date. This can be set with the Date and
Time utility (see “Setting the system date and time” on page 10-2).
IP Address: The Netopia Router’s IP address, entered in the IP
Setup screen.
IPX Network Address: The Netopia Router’s IPX address, entered in
the IPX Setup screen.
AppleTalk ET Address: The Netopia Router’s AppleTalk address on
its EtherTalk Phase II interface, entered in the EtherTalk Phase II
Setup screen.
AppleTalk LT Address: The Netopia Router’s AppleTalk address on
its LocalTalk interface, entered in the LocalTalk Setup screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-3
Current Status
The current status section is a table showing the current status of
ISDN, the WAN, or Frame Relay.
Current ISDN Connection or WAN Status
ISDN only
Current ISDN Connection Status
---Profile Name------State---%Use-Remote Address----Est.-More Info----------
ISP
CH1
10 IP 92.163.4.1
Lcl NAT 192.163.100.6
Leased line with PPP or
HDLC enabled only
Current WAN Status
---Profile Name------State---%Use-Remote Address----Est.-More Info----------
ISP CH1 10 IP 92.163.4.1 Lcl NAT 192.163.100.6
Profile Name: Lists the name of the connection profile being used,
if any. This field will also indicate if the B-channel is in use for a
POTS call.
State: Lists the channels in use for this connection.
%Use: Indicates the average percent utilization of the maximum
capacity of the channels in use for the connection.
Remote Address: Shows the IP address of the connected remote
network if the connection is using IP. Otherwise, shows the IPX
address of the connected remote network, if using IPX. For ISDN
POTS calls, it shows the called DN if locally originated, otherwise
the calling DN (if available).
Est: Indicates whether the connection was locally or remotely
established.
More Info: Indicates, in order of priority, the NAT address in use for
this connection, the IPX address in use (if IP is also in use), or the
ISDN caller identification (if available).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Reference Guide
Current Frame Relay Status
Leased line with Frame
Relay enabled only
Current Frame Relay Status
----DLCIs In Use----Bytes Rx----Bytes Tx----Frames Rx----Frames Tx----FECNs+BECNs--
0
0
0
0
0
0
DLCIs In Use: Indicates the number of data link connection
identifiers currently in use.
Bytes Rx: Indicates the total number of bytes received on the WAN
link.
Bytes Tx: Indicates the total number of bytes sent on the WAN link.
Frames Rx: Indicates the total number of frames received on the
WAN link.
Frames Tx: Indicates the total number of frames sent on the WAN
link.
FECNs+BECNs: Indicates congestion of frames. The forward explicit
congestion notification (FECN) indicates too much data at too high a
speed is being received. The backward explicit congestion
notification (FECN) indicates too much data at too high a speed is
being sent.
LED Status
This section shows the current real-time status of the Netopia
Router’s LEDs. It is useful for remotely monitoring the router’s
status. The Quick View screen’s arrangement of LEDs corresponds
to the physical arrangement of LEDs on the router.
All interfaces
LED Status
-----ETHERNET------+--CH1-----MGMT----CH2---+-CARD-+-PWR +-------LEDS--------
LNK LNK TX COL AUI
- -
RX LNK RDY TX RX LNK
- - - -
|'-'= Off 'E'= Error
-
-
-
-
-
-
O |'O' = On '*'= Blink
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-5
Each LED representation can report one of four states:
–: A dash means the LED is off.
*: An asterisk means the LED is blinking.
O: The letter “O” means the LED is on (solid).
E: The letter “E” means the LED is reporting an error.
Statistics
• General Statistics
Main
Menu
• Event Histories
• Routing Tables
• Call Accounting
Statistics, Utilities, Tests
When you are troubleshooting your Netopia Router, the Statistics
screens provide insight into the recent event activities of the Router.
Go to the Statistics, Utilities, Tests and select one of the options
described in the sections below.
General Statistics
To go to the General Statistics screen, select General Statistics in
the Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen.
General Statistics
---Type---------------Rx---------Tx--+-Type------------------------------------
IP Pkts
0
0
0
0 | EN Rx Packets
2 | EN Rx Errors
36 | EN Collisions
| FEBE/NEBE Err
0
0
IPX Pkts
ET II Pkts
0
0/0
0
LT Packets
0
36 | LT Bad Packets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
Reference Guide
General Statistics displays information about data traffic on the
Netopia Router’s PhoneNet and Ethernet ports. This information is
useful for monitoring and troubleshooting your LAN.
The left side of the screen lists total packets received and total
packets transmitted for the following protocols:
■
■
■
■
IP (IP packets on the Ethernet)
IPX (IPX packets on the Ethernet)
ET II (AppleTalk packets on Ethernet, using EtherTalk Phase II)
LT (LocalTalk on the PhoneNET)
The right side of the table lists the total number of occurrences of
each of five types of communication statistics:
EN Rx Packets: The number of Ethernet packets received.
EN Rx Errors: The number of bad Ethernet packets received.
EN Collisions: An error occurring when Ethernet packets are
transmitted simultaneously by nodes on the LAN.
ISDN only
FEBE/ NEBE Errors: The number of bad FEBE/ NEBE packet errors.
FEBE (Far End Bit Errors) is a counter of bad packets coming from
the ISDN switch to the Router. NEBE (Near End Bit Errors) is a
counter of bad packets coming from the Router to the ISDN switch.
LT Bad Pkts: An error occurring when unacceptable LocalTalk
packets are received by the Netopia Router.
WAN Connection Statistics
ISDN only
----------------------WAN Connection Statistics-----------------------
Ch.---Bytes Rx----Bytes Tx--Packets Rx--Packets Tx--Remote Network-----
1
2
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-7
Leased line with PPP or
HDLC enabled only
----------------------WAN Connection Statistics-----------------------
Ch.---Bytes Rx----Bytes Tx--Packets Rx--Packets Tx--Remote Network-----
1
0
0
0
0
Leased line with Frame
Relay enabled only
----------------------WAN Connection Statistics-----------------------
---------Bytes Rx-----Bytes Tx-----Frames Rx----Frames Tx----FECNs-------BECNs
0
0
0
0
0
0
The WAN Connection Statistics give the following information about
each channel of the point-to-point interface:
■
■
The number of bytes and packets received through the channel
The number of bytes and packets transmitted through the
channel
Not applicable with Frame
Relay enabled
■
■
The IP address of the remote network to which the Netopia
Router is connected through the channel
The congestion notifications (FECNs and BECNs) indicating too
much data at too high a speed begin received (FECN) or sent
(BECN)
Frame Relay LMI Statistics
Models with Frame Relay
enabled only
----------------------Frame Relay LMI Statistics-----------------------
LMI Status Pkts Rx
0 | LMI Status Enq's Tx
0
Interfaces using Frame Relay also include the Frame Relay LMI
Statistics. This section displays how many local management
interface (LMI) packets have been received and how many LMI
enquiries have been sent.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Reference Guide
DLCI Traffic Statistics
Models with Frame Relay
enabled only
DLCI Statistics
DLCI----Remote IP Addr--IPX Net----Frames Rx--Frames Tx---Bytes Rx---Bytes Tx
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
16
17
18
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
Select a DLCI and hit Return/Enter for more information.
Interfaces using Frame Relay also offer the DLCI Traffic Statistics
field. By selecting DLCI Traffic Statistics in the General Statistics
screen and pressing Return, you can view the DLCI Statistics table.
The table provides the following information for each DLCI:
DLCI: Lists the data link connection interfaces.
Remote IP Addr: The IP address of the destination node for that
DLCI.
IPX Net: The IPX address of the node sending that DLCI.
Frames Rx: The number of frames received on that DLCI.
Frames Tx: The number of frames sent with on DLCI.
Bytes Rx: The number of bytes received with on DLCI.
Bytes Tx: The number of bytes sent with on DLCI.
If the DLCI statistics table exceeds the size of the screen, you can
scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN items.
To scroll up, select the SCROLL UP item at the top of the list and
press the Return key. To scroll down, select the SCROLL DOWN
item at the bottom of the list and press Return.
To obtain more information about any DLCI listed in the table, select
the DLCI and press Return. A dialog box containing more
information about the selected DLCI will appear. Press Return or the
Escape key to dismiss the dialog box.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-9
Event Histories
The Netopia Router records certain relevant occurrences in event
histories. Event histories are useful for diagnosing problems
because they list what happened before, during, and after a
problem occurs. You can view two different event histories: one for
the router’s system and one for the ISDN or leased line.
Note: Netopia Router’s built-in battery backup prevents loss of
event history from a shut down or reset.
The Router’s event histories are structured to display most recent
events first, and to make it easy to distinguish error messages from
informational messages. Error messages are prefixed with an
asterisk.
To go to the Event Histories screen, select Event Histories in the
Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen.
Event Histories
Device Event History...
WAN Event History...
Clear Device Event History...
Clear WAN Event History...
Device Event History
The Device Event History screen lists port and system events,
giving the time and date for each event, as well as a brief
description. The most recent events appear at the top.
To go to the Device Event History screen, select Device Event
History in the Event Histories screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Reference Guide
Device Event History
Current Date --
6/4/98 09:23:53 AM
-Date-----Time-----Event------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
06/04/97 08:56:13
06/04/97 08:56:06
06/04/97 08:56:06
AppleTalk initialization complete
IPX initialization complete
IP address server initialization complete
06/04/97 08:56:06 --BOOT: Cold start v3.2-------------------------------------
06/04/97 08:52:28 AURP initialization complete
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
Return/Enter on event item for details or 'SCROLL [UP/DOWN]' item for
scrolling.
If the event history exceeds the size of the screen, you can scroll
through it by using the SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN items.
To scroll up, select the SCROLL UP item at the top of the list and
press the Return key. To scroll down, select the SCROLL DOWN
item at the bottom of the list and press Return.
To obtain more information about any event listed in the Device
Event History, select the event and then press Return. A dialog box
containing more information about the selected event will appear.
Press Return or the Escape key to dismiss the dialog box.
To clear the Device Event History, select Clear Device Event History
in the Event Histories screen.
WAN Event History
The WAN Event History screen lists events on the ISDN or leased
line. The most recent events appear at the top.
To go to the WAN Event History screen, select WAN Event History in
the Event Histories screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-11
WAN Event History
Current Date --
6/4/97 04:36:11 PM
-Date-----Time-----Event------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
06/04/97 16:35:44
06/04/97 16:35:44
06/04/97 16:35:43
06/04/97 16:35:43
06/04/97 16:35:43
06/04/97 16:35:41
06/04/97 16:35:41
PPP: IPXCP negotiated, session 1
PPP: IPCP negotiated, session 1, rem: 192.173.119.1
PPP: MP negotiated, session 1
PPP: PAP remote accepted us, Channel 1
PPP: NCP up, session 1, Channel 1
PPP: Channel 1 up, Dialout
Received Connect Ind. for DN: 915105551111
06/04/97 16:35:41 >>Issued 64Kb Setup Request from our DN: 5105771234
06/04/97 16:34:57
06/04/97 16:34:56
06/04/97 16:34:56
Received Clear Confirm for our DN: 5105771234
Requested Disc. from DN: 915105551111, Cause: 16
PPP: Channel 1 down
06/04/97 16:34:56 * PPP: PAP authentication failed, Channel 1
06/04/97 16:34:54
06/04/97 16:34:54
PPP: Channel 1 up, Dialout
Received Connect Ind. for DN: 915105551111
06/04/97 16:34:53 >>Issued 64Kb Setup Request from our DN: 5105771234
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
Return/Enter on event item for details or SCROLL [UP/DOWN] item for
scrolling.
Each entry in the list contains the following information:
Time: Time of the event.
Date: Date of the event.
Event: A brief description of the event.
Models on switched
circuits only
Ch.: The channel involved in the event.
Models on switched
circuits only
Dir. Number: The directory number (number dialed) involved in the
event.
The first event in each call sequence is marked with double arrows
(>>).
Failures are marked with an asterisk (*).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Reference Guide
If the event history exceeds the size of the screen, you can scroll
through it by using the SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN items.
To scroll up, select the SCROLL UP item at the top of the list and
item at the bottom of the list and press the Return key.
To get more information about any event listed in the WAN Event
History, select the event and then press the Return key. A dialog box
containing more information about the selected event will appear.
Press Return or the Escape key to dismiss the dialog box. Also see
Appendix D, “ISDN, DDS/ ADN, and T1 Events” for explanations of
the possible events.
To clear the WAN Event History, select Clear WAN Event History in
the Event Histories screen.
Routing Tables
You can view all of the IP, IPX and AppleTalk routes in the Netopia
Router’s IP, IPX and AppleTalk routing tables, respectively.
To go to the Routing Tables screen, select Routing Tables in the
Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Routing Tables
IP Routing Table...
IPX Routing Table...
IPX SAP Bindery Table...
AppleTalk Routing Table...
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-13
IP routing table
The IP routing table displays all of the IP routes currently known to
the Netopia Router.
To display the IP Routing Table screen, select IP Routing Table in
the Routing Tables screen and go to the IP Routing Table screen.
IPX routing table
The IPX routing table displays all of the IPC routes currently known
to the Netopia Router.
To display the IPX Routing Table screen, select IPX Routing Table in
the Routing Tables screen and go to the IPX Routing Table screen.
IPX Sap Bindery table
The IPX Sap Bindery table displays all of the IPX Sap Bindery routes
currently known to the Netopia Router.
To display the IPX Sap Bindery table screen, select IPX Sap Bindery
table in the Routing Tables screen and go to the IPX Sap Bindery
table screen.
AppleTalk routing table
The AppleTalk routing table displays information about the current
state of AppleTalk networks connected to the Netopia Router,
including remote AppleTalk networks connected with AURP. This
information is gathered from other active AppleTalk routers.
To go to the AT Routing Table screen, select AppleTalk Routing
Table in the Routing Tables screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Reference Guide
AT Routing Table
-Net---Range--(Def) Zone Name---------Hops-State-Next Rtr Addr.--Pkts Fwded---
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
1
2
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
27
31
Admin
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
Good 46.131
2
Admin
0
3
Operations
Sales
1
4
0
5
Marketing
Marketing
Customer Service
TechSports
R&D
1
6
2
7
1
8
0
10
11
12
16
*24
28
0
R&D
0
R&D
1
UNIX Services
Operations
R&D
0
186
36
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
UPDATE
'*' Entries have multiple zone names. Return/Enter on these to see zone list.
Each row in the AppleTalk routing table corresponds to an AppleTalk
route or network range. If the list of routes shown exceeds the size
of the screen, you can scroll through it by using the SCROLL UP and
SCROLL DOWN items.
To scroll up, select the SCROLL UP item at the top of the table and
press the Return key. To scroll down, select the SCROLL DOWN
item at the bottom of the table and press the Return key.
The table has the following columns:
Net: Displays the starting network number supplied by the AppleTalk
router in the ‘Next Rtr Addr. Column’. If a network number is
preceded by an asterisk (*), it has multiple zones. To display the
zones, select the network entry and press Return.
Range: Displays the ending network number for the extended
network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-15
(Def) Zone Name: Displays the zone or zones associated with the
specified network or network range. The zone name shown is either
the only zone for a non extended network (e.g.:LocalTalk networks),
or the default zone name for an extended network. To see the
complete list of zones for an extended network with multiple zones,
select the entry in the table and press the Return key. Press the
Return key again to close the list of zones.
Hops: Displays the number of routers between the Netopia Router
and the specified network.
State: Displays the state of the specified route, based on the
frequency of Routing Table Maintenance Protocol (RTMP) packets
received for the route. The state can be Good, Suspect, or Bad.
AppleTalk routers regularly exchange RTMP packets to update
AppleTalk routing information.
Next Rtr Addr.: Displays the DDP or IP address of the next hop for
the specified route. A DDP address is displayed if the router shown
is on the local AppleTalk network. DDP address means that a
connection to the next hop router is by a native AppleTalk network
(e.g.: LocalTalk or EtherTalk Phase II). An IP address is displayed if
the Netopia Router is connected to the router shown using AURP. IP
address means a connection transports over AURP (AppleTalk
encapsulated IP).
Pkts Fwded: The number of packets sent to the router shown.
The AppleTalk routing table updates automatically when you first
display this screen, but not while you are viewing it. To update the
AppleTalk routing table, select UPDATE (near the bottom left-hand
side of the screen) and press Return.
Call Accounting
The Netopia Router offers system-wide call accounting to track first
minutes (an ISDN tariff factor) and additional minutes, for initiated
data and voice calls.
To go to the Call Accounting screen, select Call Accounting in the
Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Reference Guide
Call Accounting
Enable Call Accounting:
On
Day for auto-reset of timers:
Maximum connect time (HH:MM):
12
12:00
RESET MINUTE COUNTERS
-------- Call Accounting Statistics ----------------------------------
Total First Minutes:
0
Total Additional Time (HH:MM):
Remaining Time (HH:MM):
Trigger Date(MDY):
0:00
10:25
1/1/98
To enable call accounting, follow these steps:
1. Select Enable Call Accounting and toggle it to On.
2. Select Day for auto-reset of timers and enter the day of the
month for the Router to reset the Call Accounting Statistics.
3. Select Maximum connect time (HH:MM) and enter the total
amount of time to allow for outbound calls, where HH is the
hour (using either the 12-hour or 24-hour clock) and MM is the
minutes.
4. Select RESET MINUTE COUNTERS and press Return to
manually reset the Call Accounting Statistics.
Under Call Accounting Statistics:
■
Total First Minutes displays the total number of first minutes of
outbound calls placed during the recording interval.
■
Total Additional Minutes (HH:MM) displays the total remaining
time of all outbound calls placed during the recording interval.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-17
■
■
Remaining Time (HH:MM) displays how much time is left in the
recording interval. If call accounting is not enabled, the
message will read, Call Accounting Disabled.
Trigger Date (MDY) displays the date, in month, day, year
format, when the call accounting begins.
SNMP
The Netopia Router includes a Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) agent, allowing monitoring and configuration by a
standard SNMP manager.
The Netopia Router supports the following Management Information
Base (MIB) documents:
■
■
■
■
■
■
MIB II (RFC 1213)
Interface MIB (RFC 1229)
Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643)
AppleTalk MIB-I (RFC 1243)
Frame Relay DTE MIB (RFC 1315)
Farallon Netopia MIB
These MIBs are on the Netopia Router CD included with the Netopia
Router. You should load these MIBs into your SNMP management
software in the order they are listed here. Follow the instructions
included with your SNMP manager on how to load MIBs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Reference Guide
sysObjectID and sysDescr
The value returned by the Netopia Router SNMP agent for
sysObjectID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.304.2.2.x, where x is dependent upon
your model number and defined in the table below:
Netopia
Model no.
Netopia
Model no.
x
x
420
16
5
620
17
3
430
435
440
450
455
460
630
635
640
650
655
660
6
10
4
2
8
12
13
15
9
14
The value returned by the Netopia Router SNMP agent for sysDescr
is Netopia PNyyy, where yyy is your particular Netopia Router model
number. For some models, yyy also includes a suffix to the model
number. See the table below.
Non-North American ISDN
Netopia Routers
yyy-(two-character
country code)-1S
SA Netopia Routers
T1 Netopia Routers
DDS Netopia Routers
yyy-SA
yyy-T1
yyy-DDS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-19
The SNMP Setup screen
To go to the SNMP Setup screen, select SNMP in the Advanced
Configuration screen.
SNMP Setup
System Name:
System Location:
System Contact:
Read-Only Community String:
Read/Write Community String:
public
private
Authentication Traps Enable:
IP Trap Receivers...
Off
Configure optional SNMP parameters from here.
Follow these steps to configure the first three items in the screen:
1. Select System Name and enter a descriptive name for the
Netopia Router’s SNMP agent.
2. Select System Location and enter the router’s physical location
(room, floor, building, etc.).
3. Select System Contact and enter the name of the person
responsible for maintaining the router.
System Name, System Location, and System Contact set the
values returned by the Netopia Router SNMP agent for the
SysName, SysLocation, and SysContact objects, respectively, in the
MIB-II system group. Although optional, the information you enter in
these items can help a system administrator manage the network
more efficiently.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Reference Guide
Community strings
The Read-Only Community String and the Read/ Write Community
String are like passwords that must be used by an SNMP manager
querying or configuring the Netopia Router. An SNMP manager using
the Read-Only Community String can examine statistics and
configuration information from the router, but cannot modify the
router’s configuration. An SNMP manager using the Read/ Write
Community String can both examine and modify configuration
parameters.
By default, the read-only and read/ write community strings are set
to “public” and “private,” respectively. You should change both of
the default community strings to values known only to you and
trusted system administrators.
Caution!
Even if you decide not to use SNMP, you should change the
community strings. This prevents unauthorized access to the
Netopia Router through SNMP.
For more information on security issues, see “Suggested security
measures” on page 7-2.
SNMP traps
An SNMP trap is an informational message sent from an SNMP
agent (in this case, the Netopia Router) to a manager. When a
manager receives a trap, it may log the trap as well as generate an
alert message of its own.
Standard traps generated by the Netopia Router include the
following:
■
An authentication failure trap is generated when the router
detects an incorrect community string in a received SNMP
packet. Auth. Traps Enable must be On for this trap to be
generated.
■
A cold start trap is generated after the router is reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring Tools
9-21
■
■
An interface down trap (ifDown) is generated when one of the
router’s interfaces, such as a port, stops functioning or is
disabled.
An interface up trap (ifUp) is generated when one of the
router’s interfaces, such as a port, begins functioning.
The Netopia Router sends traps using UDP (for IP networks).
You can specify which SNMP managers are sent the IP traps
generated by the Netopia Router. Up to eight receivers can be set.
You can also review and remove IP traps.
Go to the IP Trap Receivers screen by selecting IP Trap Receivers in
the SNMP Setup screen.
IP Trap Receivers
Display/Change IP Trap Receiver...
Add IP Trap Receiver...
Delete IP Trap Receiver...
Return/Enter to modify an existing Trap Receiver.
Navigate from here to view, add, modify and delete IP Trap Receivers.
Setting the IP trap receivers
1. Select Add IP Trap Receiver.
2. Select Receiver IP Address or Domain Name. Enter the IP
address or domain name of the SNMP manager you want to
receive the trap.
3. Select Community String if you enabled one in the SNMP Setup
screen, and enter the appropriate password.
4. Select Add Trap Receiver Now and press Return. You can add
up to seven more receivers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Reference Guide
Viewing IP trap receivers
To display a view-only table of IP trap receivers, select
Display/ Change IP Trap Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen.
Modifying IP trap receivers
1. To edit an IP trap receiver, select Display/ Change IP Trap
Receiver in the IP Trap Receivers screen.
2. Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return.
3. In the Change IP Trap Receiver screen, edit the information as
needed and press Return.
Deleting IP trap receivers
1. To delete an IP trap receiver, select Delete IP Trap Receiver in
the IP Trap Receivers screen.
2. Select an IP trap receiver from the table and press Return.
3. In the dialog box, select Cancel and press Return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-1
Chapter 10
Utilities and Tests
and control purposes:
■
Setting system date and time (see page 10-2)
■
Establishing and disconnecting WAN connections (see Chapter
2)
■
■
Running a ping test (see page 10-3)
and a given destination (see page 10-7)
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Upgrading feature sets and WANlets (see page 10-8)
Restarting the system (see page 10-8)
Reverting to factory default settings (see page 10-9)
Monitoring secure authentication (see Chapter 2)
Running an ISDN loopback test (see page 10-9)
Configuring the console (see page 10-11)
Transferring configurations and firmware files (see page 10-12
and page 10-17)
Note: These utilities and tests are accessible only through the
console-based management screens. If you used Web-based
management to configure your Router, see Chapter 4, “Installing the
Netopia Router,” of the Getting Started Guide for information on
accessing the console-based management screens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Reference Guide
Some utilities and tests may not be available on some Netopia
Router models, depending on the switch type and data
encapsulation method. See the following sections for more
information.
Setting the system date and time
You can set the system’s date and time in the Set Date and Time
screen.
Select Date and Time in the Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen and
press Return to go to the Set Date and Time screen.
Set Date and Time
System Date Format:
MM/DD/YY
1/1/1998
Current Date (MM/DD/YY):
System Time Format:
Current Time:
AM or PM:
AM/PM
09:40
AM
Follow these steps to set the system’s date and time:
1. Select System Date Format and choose how the date will be
displayed. DD represents the day, MM represents the month,
and YY represents the year.
2. Select Current Date and enter the date in the appropriate
format. Use one- or two-digit numbers for the month and day,
and the last two digits of the current year. The date’s numbers
must be separated by forward slashes (/ ).
3. Select System Time Format and choose the 12-hour clock
(AM/ PM) or the 24-hour clock (24hr).
4. Select Current Time and enter the time in the format HH:MM,
where HH is the hour (using either the 12-hour or 24-hour clock)
and MM is the minutes.
5. Select AM or PM and choose AM or PM. The AM or PM item
appears only if the time is in the 12-hour clock format.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests
10-3
Ping
The Netopia Router includes a standard Ping test utility. A Ping test
generates IP packets destined for a particular (Ping-capable) IP
host. Each time the target host receives a Ping packet, it returns a
packet to the original sender.
Ping allows you to see whether a particular IP destination is
reachable from the Netopia Router. You can also ascertain the
quality and reliability of the connection to the desired destination by
studying the Ping test’s statistics.
To use the Ping utility, select Ping in the Statistics, Utilities, Tests
screen and press Return to go to the Ping screen.
ICMP Ping
Name of Host to Ping:
Packets to Send:
Data Size:
5
56
1
Delay (seconds):
START PING
Status:
Packets Out:
Packets In:
0
0
Packets Lost:
Round Trip Time
(Min/Max/Avg):
0 (0%)
0.000 / 0.000 / 0.000 secs
Enter the IP Address/Domain Name of a host to ping.
Send ICMP Echo Requests to a network host.
To configure and initiate a Ping test, follow these steps:
1. Select Name of Host to Ping and enter the destination domain
name or IP address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Reference Guide
2. Select Packets to Send to change the default setting. This is
the total number of packets to be sent during the Ping test. The
default setting is adequate in most cases, but you may change
it to any value from 1 to 4,294,967,295.
3. Select Data Size to change the default setting. This is the size,
in bytes, of each Ping packet sent. The default setting is ade-
quate in most cases, but you may change it to any value from 0
(only header data) to 1664.
4. Select Delay (seconds) to change the default setting. The
delay, in seconds, determines the time between Ping packets
sent. The default setting is adequate in most cases, but you
may change it to any value from 0 to 4,294,967. A delay of 0
seconds forces packets to be sent immediately one after
another.
5. Select START PING and press Return to begin the Ping test.
While the test is running, the START PING item becomes STOP
PING. To manually stop the Ping test, select STOP PING and
press Return or the Escape key.
While the Ping test is running, and when it is over, a status field and
a number of statistical items are active on the screen. These are
described below.
Status: The current status of the Ping test. This item can display
the following messages:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests
10-5
Message
Description
Resolving host name
Can’t resolve host name
Pinging
Finding the IP address for the domain name-style address
IP address can’t be found for the domain name-style name
Ping test is in progress
Complete
Ping test was completed
Cancelled by user
Ping test was cancelled manually
Ping test was able to reach the router with IP address
w.x.y.z, which reported that the test could not reach the
final destination
Destination unreachable from
w.x.y.z
Couldn’t allocate packet buffer
Couldn’t open ICMP port
Couldn’t proceed with Ping test; try again or reset system
Couldn’t proceed with Ping test; try again or reset system
Packets Out: The number of packets sent by the Ping test.
Packets In: The number of return packets received from the target
host. To be considered “on time,” return packets are expected back
before the next packet in the sequence of Ping packets is sent. A
count of the number of late packets appears in parentheses to the
right of the Packets In count.
In the example below, a Netopia Router is sending Ping packets to
another host, which responds with return Ping packets. Note that
the second return Ping packet is considered to be late because it is
not received by the Netopia Router before the third Ping packet is
sent. The first and third return Ping packets are on time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Reference Guide
send Ping packet 1
Netopia
receive Ping packet 1
host
host
send return Ping packet 1
receive return Ping packet 1
Netopia
Netopia
send Ping packet 2
receive Ping packet 2
send return Ping packet 2
host
host
send Ping packet 3
Netopia
Netopia
receive return Ping packet 2
receive Ping packet 3
host
host
send return Ping packet 3
receive return Ping packet 3
Netopia
Packets Lost: The number of packets unaccounted for, shown in
total and as a percentage of total packets sent. This statistic may
be updated during the Ping test, and may not be accurate until after
the test is over. However, if an escalating one-to-one
correspondence is seen between Packets Out and Packets Lost,
and Packets In is noticeably lagging behind Packets Out, the
destination is probably unreachable. In this case, use STOP PING.
Round Trip Time (Min/ Max/ Avg): Statistics showing the
minimum, maximum, and average number of seconds elapsing
between the time each Ping packet was sent and the time its
corresponding return Ping packet was received.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests
10-7
The time-to-live (TTL) value for each Ping packet sent by the Netopia
Router is 255, the maximum allowed. The TTL value defines the
number of IP routers that the packet can traverse. Ping packets that
reach their TTL value are dropped, and a “destination unreachable”
notification is returned to the sender (see the table above). This
ensures that no infinite routing loops occur. The TTL value can be
set and retrieved using the SNMP MIB-II ip group’s ipDefaultTTL
object.
Tracing a route
You can count the number of routers between your Netopia Router
and a given destination with the Trace Route utility.
Select Trace Route in the Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen and
press Return to go to the Trace Route screen.
Trace Route
Host Name or IP Address:
Maximum Hops:
30
Timeout (seconds):
5
Use Reverse DNS:
Yes
START TRACE ROUTE
Trace route to a network host.
To trace a route, follow these steps:
1. Select Host Name or IP Address and enter the name or
address of the destination you want to trace.
2. Select Maximum hops (1..64) to set the maximum number of
routers to count between the Netopia Router and the
destination router, up to 64. The default is 30 hops.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Reference Guide
3. Select Timeout per probe (1..10 sec) to set when the trace will
timeout for each hop, up to 10 seconds. The default is 3
seconds.
4. Select Use Reverse DNS to learn the names of the routers
between the Netopia Router and the destination router. The
default is Yes.
5. Select START TRACE ROUTE and press Return. The screen will
be replaced by a scrolling screen, listing the destination, the
number of hops, the IP addresses of each hop, and the DNS
names, if selected.
6. Cancel the trace by pressing Esc. Return to the Trace Route
screen by pressing Esc twice.
Upgrading the Netopia Router
You can upgrade your Netopia Router by adding new feature sets
through the Upgrade Feature Set utility.
See the release notes that came with your router or visit the
Farallon web site at www.farallon.com for information on new
feature sets, how to obtain them, and how to install them on your
Netopia Router.
Restarting the system
You can restart the system by selecting the Restart System item in
the Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen.
You must restart the system whenever you reconfigure the Netopia
Router and want the new parameter values to take effect. Under
certain circumstances, restarting the system may also clear up
system or network malfunctions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests
10-9
Factory defaults
You can reset the Netopia Router to its factory default settings.
Select the Revert to Factory Defaults item in the Statistics,
Utilities, Tests screen and press Return. Select CONTINUE in the
dialog box and press Return. The Netopia Router settings will return
to the factory defaults, deleting your configurations.
The ISDN loopback test
The ISDN loopback test is designed to confirm the existence of a
working ISDN line and the proper configuration of certain Netopia
Router parameters. This test is available only on switched ISDN
lines.
Using the first B-channel, the test calls the Netopia Router on the
second B-channel, creating a call loop back to the unit.
To run the ISDN loopback test, select ISDN Switch Loopback Test
in the Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen and press Return to go to
the ISDN Switch Loopback Test screen.
ISDN Switch Loopback Test
Run Test Now
Status:
Untested
Select Run Test Now and press Return. The loopback test is
executed immediately.
Note: Make sure neither B-channel is in use before you execute the
loopback test.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10 Reference Guide
The Status item reports one of three results:
Untested: The loopback test has not yet been run.
Loopback Test FAILED: The loopback test has failed. See “If the
loopback test fails,” below, for troubleshooting suggestions.
Loopback Test PASSED. The loopback test was successful. The
line is working properly, and the directory numbers (the ISDN phone
numbers associated with each B-channel) are correct. If a SPID is
associated with the first B-channel, its correctness is also
confirmed. If a SPID is associated with the second B-channel, its
correctness is confirmed.
Note: SPIDs are applicable to certain North American ISDN switch
protocols.
If the loopback test fails
Follow these suggestions to track down the reason behind the
loopback test’s failure:
■
■
Check that the WAN Ready LED is solid green.
Check the ISDN event log and get more information about
events that seem relevant to the failure.
■
■
Check the B-channel usage in the Quick View screen to make
sure there were no active calls when the loopback test was
performed.
Check the accuracy of the directory numbers, SPIDs, and
switch protocol you entered in the ISDN Line Configuration
screen (compare them with the information you received from
your ISDN service provider).
■
■
■
Verify termination of the S/ T bus.
Contact your ISDN service provider to have the line checked.
Check that your line is not provisioned for voice only (Circuit
Switched Voice).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests 10-11
Console configuration
In the Getting Started Guide, it was suggested that you set the
communications parameters in your terminal emulation software to
match the Netopia Router’s default settings. However, you can
change the default terminal communications parameters to suit
your requirements.
To go to the Console Configuration screen, select Console
Configuration in the Advanced Configuration screen.
Console Configuration
Baud Rate...
9600
Bits per Character...
Stop Bits...
8
1
Parity...
No Parity
CANCEL
SET CONFIG NOW
Follow these steps to change a parameter’s value:
1. Select the parameter you want to change.
2. Select a new value for the parameter. Return to step 1 if you
want to configure another parameter.
3. Select SET CONFIG NOW to save the new parameter settings.
Select CANCEL to leave the parameters unchanged and exit
the Console Configuration screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12 Reference Guide
Transferring configuration and firmware files with XMODEM
You can transfer configuration and firmware files with XMODEM
through the Netopia Router’s console or PC Card (PCMCIA) port.
To go to the PC Card Config/ Firmware Transfer screen, select
PC Card Config/ Firmware Transfer in the Advanced Configuration
screen.
PC Card Config/Firmware Transfer
Send Firmware to Netopia...
Send Config to Netopia...
Receive Config from Netopia...
PC Card Modem Init String:
AT&F&C1&D2E0S0=1\J0\Q3
The transfer you initiate will occur through the port from which you
initiate it. If you are connected to the Netopia Router through its
console port, the transfer will occur through that port. If you are
connected through the PC Card port, the transfer will occur through
that port.
Using the console port
Using the Netopia Router’s screens through the console port.
involves using either a PC or Macintosh computer with a terminal
emulation program that supports XMODEM file transfers.
See the Getting Started Guide for directions on how to configure
your terminal emulation program.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests 10-13
Using the SmartPort
Follow these steps to prepare to use the SmartPort (PC Card port):
1. Connect a standard PC Card modem to the port. See
“Connecting a modem to the SmartPort” on page 1-4 for more
information.
The modem will be initialized using the default string contained
in the PC Card Modem Init String item in the PC Card
Config/ Firmware Transfer screen. Consult your modem’s user’s
guide and edit the default string it includes commands not
supported by your modem. You may choose to substitute
equivalent commands.
2. Connect a standard, working analog telephone line (not an
ISDN line) to the modem.
3. Call the modem from another site using a computer, a modem,
and a terminal emulation program (like the one used with the
console port). The terminal emulation program should be
configured as specified in the Getting Started guide.
Once you connect to the Netopia Router’s modem, you should see
the configuration screens. Press Ctrl-L if you connect but are unable
to see the screens.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14 Reference Guide
Updating firmware
Firmware updates may be available periodically from Farallon or
from a site maintained by your organization’s network administra-
tion.
The procedure below applies whether you are using the console or
the PC Card port.
Follow these steps to update the Netopia Router’s firmware:
1. Make sure you have the firmware file on disk and know the path
to its location.
2. Select Send Firmware to Netopia and press Return. The
following dialog box appears:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Are you sure you want to send a firmware file to your Netopia?
| If so, when you hit Return/Enter on the CONTINUE button, you will
| have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program.
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
3. Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file, or select
CONTINUE to download the file.
If you choose CONTINUE, you will have ten seconds to use your
terminal emulation software to initiate an XMODEM transfer of
the firmware file. If you fail to initiate the transfer in that time,
the dialog box will disappear and the terminal emulation
software will inform you of the transfer’s failure. You can then
try again.
The system will reset at the end of a successful file transfer to
put the new firmware into effect. While the system resets, the
LEDs will blink on and off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests 10-15
Caution!
Do not manually reset the Netopia Router while it is
automatically resetting or it could be damaged.
Downloading configuration files
The Netopia Router can be configured by downloading a
configuration file. The downloaded file reconfigures all of the
Router’s parameters.
Configuration files are available from a site maintained by your
organization’s network administrator or from your local site (see
“Uploading configuration files,” below).
The procedure below applies whether you are using the console or
the PC Card port.
Follow these steps to download a configuration file:
1. Make sure you have the configuration file on disk and know the
path to its location.
2. Select Send Config to Netopia and press Return. The following
dialog box appears:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Do you want to send a saved configuration to your Netopia?
| If so, when you hit Return/Enter on the CONTINUE button, you will
| have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program.
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
3. Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file, or select
CONTINUE to download the file.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-16 Reference Guide
If you choose CONTINUE, you will have ten seconds to use your
terminal emulation software to initiate an XMODEM transfer of
the configuration file. If you fail to initiate the transfer in that
time, the dialog box will disappear and the terminal emulation
software will inform you of the transfer’s failure. You can then
try again.
The system will reset at the end of a successful file transfer to
put the new configuration into effect.
Uploading configuration files
A file containing a snapshot of the Netopia Router’s current
configuration can be uploaded from the Router to disk. The file can
then be downloaded by a different Netopia Router to configure its
parameters (see “Downloading configuration files” on page 10-15).
This is useful for configuring a number of Routers with identical
parameters, or for creating configuration backup files.
Uploading a file can also be useful for troubleshooting purposes.
The uploaded configuration file can be tested on a different Netopia
Router by Farallon or your network administrator.
The procedure below applies whether you are using the console or
the PC Card port.
To upload a configuration file:
1. Decide on a name for the file and a path for saving it.
2. Select Receive Config from Netopia and press Return. The
following dialog box appears:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Are you sure you want to save your current Netopia configuration? |
| If so, when you hit Return/Enter on the CONTINUE button, you will |
| have 10 seconds to begin the transfer from your terminal program. |
|
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests 10-17
3. Select CANCEL to exit without uploading the file, or select
CONTINUE to upload the file.
If you choose CONTINUE, you will have ten seconds to use your
terminal emulation software to initiate an XMODEM transfer of
the configuration file. If you fail to initiate the transfer in that
time, the dialog box will disappear and the terminal emulation
software will inform you of the transfer’s failure. You can then
try again.
Transferring configuration and firmware files with TFTP
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a method of transferring data
over an IP network. TFTP is a client-server application, with the
Router as the client. To use the Router as a TFTP client, a TFTP
server must be available.
To use TFTP, select Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) in the
Advanced Configuration screen and press Return to go to the Trivial
File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) screen.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
TFTP Server Name:
Firmware File Name:
GET FIRMWARE FROM SERVER...
Config File Name:
GET CONFIG FROM SERVER...
SEND CONFIG TO SERVER...
TFTP Transfer State -- Idle
TFTP Current Transfer Bytes -- 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-18 Reference Guide
The sections below describe how to update the Router’s firmware
and how to download and upload configuration files.
Updating firmware
Firmware updates may be available periodically from Farallon or
from a site maintained by your organization’s network administrator.
To update the Router’s firmware, follow these steps:
1. Select TFTP Server Name and enter the DNS name or IP
address of the TFTP server you will use. The DNS name or IP
address is available from the site where the server is located.
2. Select Firmware File Name and enter the name of the file you
will download. The name of the file is available from the site
where the server is located. You may need to enter a file path
along with the file name (for example, bigroot/ config/ myfile).
3. Select GET FIRMWARE FROM SERVER and press Return. You
will see the following dialog box:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Are you sure you want to send a firmware file to your Netopia?
|
|
|
|
| The device will restart when the transfer is complete.
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------+
Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file, or select
CONTINUE to download the file. The system will reset at the
end of the file transfer to put the new firmware into effect.
While the system resets, the LEDs will blink on and off.
Caution!
Do not manually reset the Netopia Router while it is automatically
resetting or it could be damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests 10-19
4. If you choose to download the firmware, the TFTP Transfer
State item will change from Idle to Reading Firmware. The
TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of
bytes transferred.
Downloading configuration files
The Router can be configured by downloading a configuration file
using TFTP. Once downloaded, the file reconfigures all of the
Router’s parameters as if someone had manually done so through
the console port.
To download a configuration file, follow these steps:
1. Select TFTP Server Name and enter the DNS name or IP
address of the TFTP server you will use. The DNS name or IP
address is available from the site where the server is located.
2. Select Config File Name and enter the name of the file you will
download. The name of the file is available from the site where
the server is located. You may need to enter a file path along
with the file name (for example, bigroot/ config/ myfile).
3. Select GET CONFIG FROM SERVER and press Return. You will
see the following dialog box:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Are you sure you want to send a saved configuration to your Netopia? |
|
|
|
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Select CANCEL to exit without downloading the file, or select
CONTINUE to download the file. The system will reset at the
end of the file transfer to put the new configuration into effect.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-20 Reference Guide
4. If you choose to download the configuration file, the TFTP
Transfer State item will change from Idle to Reading Config.
The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the number of
bytes transferred.
Uploading configuration files
Using TFTP, you can send a file containing a snapshot of the
Router’s current configuration to a TFTP server. The file can then be
downloaded by a different Netopia Router unit to configure its
parameters (see “Downloading configuration files” on page 10-19).
This is useful for configuring a number of Routers with identical
parameters, or just for creating configuration backup files.
Uploading a file can also be useful for troubleshooting purposes.
The uploaded configuration file can be tested on a different Netopia
Router unit by Farallon or your network administrator.
To upload a configuration file, follow these steps:
1. Select TFTP Server Name and enter the DNS name or IP
address of the TFTP server you will use. The DNS name or IP
address is available from the site where the server is located.
2. Select Config File Name and enter a name for the file you will
upload. The file will appear with the name you choose on the
TFTP server. You may need to enter a file path along with the
file name (for example, Mypc/ Netopia/ myfile).
3. Select SEND CONFIG TO SERVER and press Return. You will
see the following dialog box:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilities and Tests 10-21
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Are you sure you want to save your current Netopia configuration? |
|
|
|
|
|
|
CANCEL
CONTINUE
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Select CANCEL to exit without uploading the file, or select
CONTINUE to upload the file. The system will reset at the end
of the file transfer to put the new configuration into effect.
4. The TFTP Transfer State item will change from Idle to Writing
Config. The TFTP Current Transfer Bytes item will reflect the
number of bytes transferred.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-22 Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-1
Appendix A
Troubleshooting
This appendix is intended to help you troubleshoot problems you
may encounter while using the Netopia Router. It also includes
information on how to contact Farallon Technical Support.
Important information on these problems may be found in the event
histories kept by the Netopia Router. These event histories can be
accessed in the Statistics, Utilities, Tests screen.
Power outages
If you suspect that power was restored after a power outage, and
the Netopia Router is connected to a remote site, you may need to
switch the Netopia Router off and then back on again. After
temporary power outages, a connection that still seems to be up
may actually be disconnected. Rebooting the Router should
reestablish the connection.
Configuration problems
If you reconfigure the Netopia Router and the reconfigured settings
do not seem to be taking effect, reset (restart) the system. You can
reset the system by switching the Netopia Router off and back on.
Resetting the system will cause new configuration settings to take
effect.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-2
Reference Guide
Console connection problems
Can’t see the configuration screens (nothing appears)
■
■
■
■
Check the cable connection from the Netopia Router’s console
port to the computer being used as a console.
Check that the terminal emulation software is accessing the
correct port on the computer that’s being used as a console.
Try pressing Ctrl-L or Return several times to refresh the
terminal screen.
Check that flow control on serial connections is turned off.
Junk characters appear on the screen
■
Check that the terminal emulation software is configured
correctly.
■
Check the baud rate.
Characters are missing from some of the configuration screens
■
Try changing the Netopia Router’s default speed of 9.6 kbps
and setting your terminal emulation software to match the new
speed.
ISDN problems
The WAN Ready LED is blinking red
This is an indication that the Netopia Router cannot detect the ISDN
switch at your ISDN service provider’s central office.
■
Check that the cable you are using for ISDN is not a 10Base-T
cable, which can look similar to an ISDN cable.
■
Check that you have plugged the correct cable into the Netopia
Router’s ISDN port, and not one of its EtherWave ports.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
A-3
The WAN Ready LED is solid red
This is an indication that the Netopia Router is unable to
synchronize with the switch at your ISDN service provider’s central
office.
■
Confirm that you have entered the correct directory numbers
when configuring the Router.
■
Confirm that you have configured the Router with the correct
ISDN switch protocol. The protocol selected should match the
one used on your ISDN line.
■
Check the ISDN event history to see what error it reports. You
can select any event shown in the history and press Return to
The WAN Ready LED is off
■
The initial call made or received on the ISDN line may activate
the WAN Ready LED. You can also activate the LED by using the
ISDN loopback test. See “The ISDN loopback test” on
page 10-9 for more information on using the ISDN loopback
test.
Calls do not go through
If the Ready LED is glowing solid green and the ISDN loopback test
is successful, calls you make with the Netopia Router should go
through. There may be several reasons why a particular call does
not go through:
■
■
The number being dialed is wrong.
The connection profile being used has the Dial On Demand
parameter (in the Telco Options screen) set to No. It should be
set to Yes, or you must manually initiate the call.
■
■
The connection profile being used has the Dial parameter (in
the Telco Options screen) set to Dial In Only. It should be set to
Dial In/ Out or Dial Out Only.
The IP address is not set to 0.0.0.0 in the connection profile.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-4
Reference Guide
If you are trying to call an ISP, confirm the following:
■
■
The ISP’s directory number
The authorization method you use (PAP, CHAP, or none) to
access your ISP account
■
■
If using PAP or CHAP, the name and password/ secret you were
given and their case (uppercase or lowercase)
The ISP’s IP address
Check the ISDN event history for more information.
Frame Relay problems
■
Check the LMI to see if the Router is communicating over
Frame Relay.
■
■
Make sure the Router is auto-detecting the DLCI.
Make sure the Router is using inverse ARP for the remote IP
address, or the manually entered remote IP address is correct.
■
Verify the port speed, CIR, B , and B .
c
e
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
A-5
Network problems
This section contains tips on ways you can troubleshoot a
networking problem.
■
Verify the accuracy of the default gateway’s IP address (entered
in the IP Setup or Easy Setup screen).
■
Use the Netopia Router’s ping utility, in the Statistics, Tests,
Utilities screen, and try to ping local and remote hosts. See
“Ping” on page 10-3 for instructions on how to use the ping
utility. If you can successfully ping hosts using their IP
addresses but not their domain names (198.34.7.1 but not
garcia.farallon.com, for example), verify that the DNS server’s
IP address is correct and that it is reachable from the Netopia
Router (use ping).
■
If you are using filters, check that your filter sets are not
blocking the type of connections you are trying to make.
Local routing problems
■
Observe the Ethernet LEDs to see if data traffic flow appears to
be normal.
■
Check the WAN Statistics and LAN Statistics screens to see
more specific information on data traffic flow and address
serving.
■
If you are using MacIP subnetting, make sure Transmit RIP is
On (see the IP Options screen).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-6
Reference Guide
Internal termination switch
Non-North American
models only
The Netopia Router includes an internal termination switch for
terminating the S/ T bus. The S/ T bus is the connection from the
Router to the NT1 or wall jack on your ISDN line. The S/ T bus must
be properly terminated to avoid ISDN communications errors.
The Netopia Router ships with its internal termination switch set to
the off position. This means that you should already have S/ T bus
termination. If you are unsure of whether you have S/ T bus
termination, contact your ISDN service provider.
If you do not have S/ T bus termination, you should set the internal
termination switch to the on position.
The switch is located just inside a rear-panel ventilation hole that is
visibly larger than the other holes, as shown in the following
illustration:
Large vent hole
Switch
in on
position
Switch
in off
position
The Netopia Router’s opening for accessing the internal termination switch.
Use a pointed object, such as a pen, to carefully reach inside the
correct ventilation hole and slide the switch to the left. This is the
on position, with termination in effect.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
A-7
Technical support
Farallon Communications is committed to providing its customers
with reliable products and documentation, backed by excellent
technical support.
Before contacting Farallon
Look in this guide and in the accompanying Getting Started guide
for a solution to your problem. You may find a solution in this
troubleshooting appendix or in other sections. Check the index for a
reference to the topic of concern. If you cannot find a solution,
complete the environment profile below before contacting technical
support.
Environment profile
■
Locate the Netopia Router’s model number, product serial
number, and firmware version. The serial number is on the
bottom side of the Router, along with the model number. The
firmware version appears in the Netopia Router’s Main Menu
screen.
Model number:__________________________
Serial number: _________________________
Firmware version: _______________________
■
What kind of local network(s) do you have, with how many
devices?
Ethernet
LocalTalk
EtherTalk
TCP/ IP
IPX
Other: _________________________________
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-8
Reference Guide
How to reach us
We can help you with your problem more effectively if you have
completed the environment profile in the previous section. If you
contact us by telephone, please be ready to supply Farallon Technical
Support with the information you used to configure the Netopia
Router. Also, please be at the site of the problem and prepared to
reproduce it and to try some troubleshooting steps.
When you are prepared, contact Farallon Customer Service by e-mail,
telephone, fax, or post:
Internet: techsports@farallon.com (for technical support)
info@farallon.com (for general information)
Phone: 1 510-814-5000
Fax: 1 510-814-5023
Farallon Communications, Inc.
Customer Service
2470 Mariner Square Loop
Alameda, California 94501
USA
Farallon Bulletin Board Service: 1 510-865-1321
Online product information
Product information can be found in the following:
Farallon World Wide Web server via http:/ / www.farallon.com
Internet via anonymous FTP to ftp.farallon.com/ pub
AppleLink (Third Parties A-G)
FAX-Back
This service provides technical notes which answer the most
commonly asked questions, and offer solutions for many common
problems encountered with Farallon products.
FAX-Back: +1 510-814-5040
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
A-9
Local service
If you are not located in the United States or Canada, you can get
service locally by contacting your nearest Farallon reseller or
distributor. For a worldwide list of our distributors, see our AppleLink
bulletin board or contact Farallon directly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-10
Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-1
Appendix B
Understanding IP Addressing
This appendix is a brief general introduction to IP addressing. A
basic understanding of IP will help you in configuring the Netopia
Router and using some of its powerful features, such as static
routes and packet filtering.
In packets, a header is part of the envelope information that
surrounds the actual data being transmitted. In e-mail, a header is
usually the address and routing information found at the top of
messages.
What is IP?
All networks use protocols to establish common standards for
communication. One widely used network protocol is the Internet
Protocol, also known as IP. Like many other protocols, IP uses
packets, or formatted chunks of data, to communicate.
Note: This guide uses the term “IP” in a very general and inclusive
way, to identify all of the following:
■
Networks that use the Internet Protocol, along with
accompanying protocols such as TCP, UDP, and ICMP
■
■
Packets that include an IP header within their structure
Devices that send IP packets
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-2
Reference Guide
About IP addressing
Every networking protocol uses some form of addressing in order to
ensure that packets are delivered correctly. In IP, individual network
devices that are initial sources and final destinations of packets are
usually called hosts, instead of nodes, but the two terms are inter-
changeable. Each host on an IP network must have a unique IP
address. An IP address, also called an Internet address, is a 32-bit
number usually expressed as four decimal numbers separated by
periods. Each decimal number in an IP address represents a 1-byte
(8-bit) binary number. Thus, values for each of the four numbers
range from 00000000 to 11111111 in binary notation, or from 0 to
255 in decimal notation. The expression 192.9.200.3 is a typical
example of an IP address.
IP addresses indicate both the identity of the network and the
identity of the individual host on the network. The number of bits
used for the network number and the number of bits used for the
host number can vary, as long as certain rules are followed. The
local network manager assigns IP host numbers to individual
machines.
IP addresses are maintained and assigned by the InterNIC, a
quasi-governmental organization now increasingly under the
auspices of private industry.
Note: It’s very common for an organization to obtain an IP address
from a third party, usually an Internet service provider (ISP). ISPs
usually issue an IP address when they are contracted to provide
Internet access services.
The InterNIC (the NIC stands for Network Information Center) divides
IP addresses into several classes. Classes A, B, and C are assigned
to organizations who request addresses. In Class A networks, the
first byte of an IP address is reserved for the network portion of the
address. Class B networks reserve the first two bytes of an IP
address for the network address. Class C networks reserve the first
three bytes of an IP address for the network address. In all cases, a
network manager can decide to use subnetting to assign even more
bits to the network portion of the IP address, but never less than
the class requires. The following section gives more information on
subnetting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing
B-3
Class A networks have a small number of possible network
numbers, but a large number of possible host numbers. Conversely,
Class C networks have a small number of possible host numbers,
but a large number of possible network numbers. Thus, the InterNIC
assigns Class A addresses to large organizations that have very
large numbers of IP hosts, while smaller organizations, with fewer
hosts, get Class B or Class C addresses. You can tell the various
classes apart by the value of the first (or high-order) byte. Class A
networks use values from 1 to 127, Class B networks use values
from 128 to 191, and Class C networks use values from 192 to
223. The following table summarizes some of the differences
between Class A, B, and C networks.
Number of
Number of
hosts
possible per
network
networks
possible per
class
Format of address
(without subnetting)
Class
First byte
Example
A
B
C
1-127
128-191
192-223
127
16,384
16,777,214
65,534
254
net.host.host.host
net.net.host.host
net.net.net.host
97.3.14.250
140.100.10.11
197.204.13.7
2,097,152
Subnets and subnet masks
Often an entire organization is assigned only one IP network
number. If the organization has several IP networks connected
together with IP routers, the network manager can use subnetting to
distinguish between these networks, even though they all use the
same network number. Each physical network becomes a subnet
with a unique subnet number.
Subnet numbers appear within IP addresses, along with network
numbers and host numbers. Since an IP address is always 32 bits
long, using subnet numbers means either the network number or
the host numbers must use fewer bits, in order to leave room for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-4
Reference Guide
the subnet numbers. Since the InterNIC assigns the network
number proper, it should not change, so the subnet numbers must
be created out of bits that would otherwise be part of the host
numbers.
Subnet masks
To create subnets, the network manager must define a subnet
mask, a 32-bit number that indicates which bits in an IP address are
used for network and subnetwork addresses, and which are used
for host addresses. One subnet mask should apply to all IP
networks that are physically connected together and share a single
assigned network number. Subnet masks are often written in
decimal notation, like IP addresses, but they are most easily
understood in binary notation. When a subnet mask is written in
binary notation, each numeral 1 indicates that the corresponding bit
in the IP address is part of the network or subnet address. Each 0
indicates that the corresponding bit is part of the host address. The
following table shows the proper subnet masks to use for each
class of network, when no subnets are required.
Class
Subnet mask for a network with no subnets
Binary: 11111111.00000000.00000000.00000000
Decimal: 255.0.0.0
A
Binary: 11111111.11111111.00000000.00000000
Decimal: 255.255.0.0
B
C
Binary: 11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000
Decimal: 255.255.255.0
To know whether subnets are being used or not, you must know
what subnet mask is being used—you cannot determine this
information simply from an IP address. Subnet mask information is
configured as part of the process of setting up IP routers and
gateways such as the Netopia Router.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing
B-5
Note: If you receive an IP address from an ISP, there must be a
mask associated with that IP address. By using the IP address with
the mask you can discover exactly how many IP host addresses you
actually have.
To configure subnets properly, you must also be able to convert
between binary notation and decimal notation.
Example: Using subnets on a Class C IP internet
Suppose that your organization has a total of 25 IP hosts situated
on three different floors of your office building, and that you are in
charge of designing the network that will connect them. You obtain a
Class C network number, 199.14.17.0, since you expect that your
organization will always have fewer than 254 IP hosts. All your IP
hosts will use IP addresses of the form 199.14.17.x, where x
represents the eight bits that can be used for subnet numbers and
individual host numbers.
How many of the final eight bits of the IP address should you
reserve for hosts, and how many should you use for subnet
numbers? The answer depends on how many subnets you expect to
need, and how many hosts you expect to put on each subnet. All 25
of your hosts could certainly coexist on one network that does not
use subnetting. However, you are fortunate enough to have two IP
routers on hand, so you decide to lower traffic levels and simplify
troubleshooting by setting up three subnets, one for each floor. The
following table lists how many subnets and how many hosts you
may have for a Class C network, depending on how many bits you
allocate to the subnet numbers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-6
Reference Guide
Subnetting options for a Class C IP network
Number of
hosts possible
on each subnet
Number of bits for
subnet number
Number of
subnets possible
Subnet mask chosen
11111111.11111111.11111111.10000000
or 255.255.255.128
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
126
62
30
14
6
11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000
or 255.255.255.192
11111111.11111111.11111111.11100000
or 255.255.255.224
6
11111111.11111111.11111111.11110000
or 255.255.255.240
14
30
62
126
254
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111000
or 255.255.255.248
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100
or 255.255.255.252
2
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111110
or 255.255.255.254
0
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111111
or 255.255.255.255
0
As you can see, subnet masks that allocate one, seven, or eight
bits to subnets are useless for a Class C network. This is because
binary host addresses or subnet addresses that are composed of
all zeros or all ones are reserved for broadcasting (see
“Broadcasts” on page B-16). Class A or Class B networks, on the
other hand, would still have many host numbers available if the
network manager chose a subnet mask that allocated seven or
eight bits to subnets.
1. Decide on a subnet strategy
Your 25 IP hosts are arranged as follows: 10 on the third floor, eight
on the fourth floor, and seven on the fifth floor. Since you will need
at least ten host addresses per subnet, the preceding table
indicates that you must choose a subnet mask that allocates four or
fewer bits to the subnet address. You decide to use a subnet mask
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing
B-7
that allocates five bits to the host address and three to the subnet
address. This gives you a potential of six subnets of 30 machines
each.
2. Determine the subnet mask
You can find the subnet mask associated with your subnetting
choice in the table above. IP does not specify which bits are to be
used for the subnet numbers and which for the host numbers, but it
is conventional to use the left-most bits for the subnet numbers.
This allows you to use an unbroken series of host numbers on each
subnet, although there will be big gaps between your subnet
numbers.
Now you can calculate the legal range of host numbers you can use
on each of your subnets, the legal subnet numbers you can use,
and the combined totals to use when setting up each host with its
own IP address.
3. Find the actual host numbers
First, determine which host numbers are legal. In this example, host
numbers are five bits long, meaning that values can range from
00000 to 11111 in binary notation. Remember that 00000 and
11111 are reserved for broadcasts. Actual host numbers,
therefore, would be 00001 through 11110 in binary notation, or 1
through 30 in decimal notation.
4. Find the actual subnet numbers
Next, determine which subnet numbers are legal. In this example,
the subnet numbers could be any eight bits that meet two
constraints. The first constraint is that the five least significant
digits must be zero, as these bits are allocated to the host number
and cannot be used in the subnet number. The second constraint is
that the three most significant bits must not be all zeros or all ones,
as these values are reserved for broadcasting. So the legal subnet
numbers are 00100000, 01000000, 01100000, 10000000,
10100000, and 11000000. When translated into decimal notation,
these possible subnet numbers are 32, 64, 96, 128, 160, and
192. You decide to use 32, 64, and 96 as the subnet numbers for
your three subnets: 32 for the third floor, 64 for the fourth floor, and
96 for the fifth floor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-8
Reference Guide
5. Determine the host addresses
Finally, combine your subnet numbers with your host numbers to
determine the actual IP addresses you may use for your 25 hosts.
The first three bytes of the address will always be 199.14.17, as
assigned to you by InterNIC. The final byte will be the sum of the
subnet number and the host number. The following table shows the
ranges of IP addresses you can choose from when you configure
each host.
Smallest
host
number
Largest
host
number
Smallest
combined
total
Largest
combined
total
Subnet
location number
Subnet
IP address range
3rd floor 32
1
30
30
30
33
65
97
62
199.14.17.33 to
199.14.17.62
4th floor 64
5th floor 96
1
1
94
199.14.17.65 to
199.14.17.94
126
199.14.17.97 to
199.14.17.126
Example: Working with a Class C subnet
Suppose that your organization has a site with only 10 hosts, and
no plans to add any new hosts. You don’t need a full Class C
address for this site. Many ISPs offer Internet access with only a
portion of a full Internet address.
For example, you may obtain the Class C address 199.14.17.48,
with the mask 255.255.255.240. From the previous example, you
can see that this gives you 14 host addresses to distribute to the
hosts at your site. In effect, your existing network of 10 hosts is a
subnet of the ISP’s network. Since the Class C address has already
been reduced to subnets, you cannot further subnet your network
without the risk of creating network routing problems (since you
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing
B-9
must use the mask issued by the ISP). This, however, is not a
problematic limitation for your small network.
The advantages to this situation is the greater ease and lower cost
of obtaining a subnet from an ISP rather than a full Class C address.
Distributing IP addresses
To set up a connection to the Internet, you may have obtained a
block of IP host addresses from an Internet service provider. When
configuring the Netopia Router, you gave one of those addresses to
its Ethernet port, leaving a number of addresses to distribute to
computers on your network.
There are two schemes for distributing the remaining IP addresses:
■
■
Manually give each computer an address
Let the Netopia Router automatically distribute the addresses
These two methods are not mutually exclusive; you can manually
issue some of the addresses while the rest are distributed by the
Netopia Router. Using the Router in this way allows it to function as
an address server.
One reason to use the Netopia Router as an address server is that
it takes less time than manually distributing the addresses. This is
particularly true if you have many addresses to distribute. You only
need to enter information once, rather than having to repeatedly
enter it on each host separately. This also reduces the potential for
misconfiguring hosts.
Another reason to use the Netopia Router as an address server is
that it will only distribute addresses to hosts that need to use them.
If there is a shortage of addresses, the address server will
automatically take an address away from a host that has stopped
using it and give it to a host that is requesting one. If you do not
possess enough addresses for every host on your network to have
one at all times, using address serving to distribute them is one
solution. However, this is not an efficient solution because a host
without an IP address will be forced to wait until a host with one is
turned off or gives up its IP address for some other reason.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-10
Reference Guide
Manually distributing IP addresses
If you choose to manually distribute IP addresses, you must enter
each computer’s address into its TCP/ IP stack software. Once you
manually issue an address to a computer, it possesses that
address until you manually remove it. That’s why manually
distributed addresses are sometimes called static addresses.
Static addresses are useful in cases when you want to make sure
that a host on your network cannot have its address taken away by
the address server. A network administrator’s computer, a computer
dedicated to communicating with the Internet, and routers are
appropriate candidates for a static address.
Using address serving
The Netopia Router provides two ways to serve IP addresses to
computers on a network. The first, Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP), is supported by PCs with Microsoft Windows and a
TCP/ IP stack. Macintosh computers using Open Transport and
computers using the UNIX operating system may also be able to use
DHCP. The second way, MacIP, is for Macintosh computers. MacIP is
provided with the Netopia Internet Software Starter Kit.
The Netopia Router can use both DHCP and MacIP. Whether you use
one or both will depend on your particular networking environment.
If that environment includes both PCs and Macintosh computers
that do not use Open Transport, you will need to use both DHCP and
MacIP to distribute IP addresses to all of your computers.
Tips and rules for distributing IP addresses
■
Before you allocate IP addresses using DHCP and MacIP,
consider whether you need to set aside any static addresses.
■
Note any planned and currently used static addresses before
you use DHCP and MacIP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing
B-11
■
Avoid fragmenting your block of IP addresses. For example, try
to use a continuous range for the static addresses you choose.
Distributed to the Netopia Router
1
1
(Ethernet IP address)
2
3
4
2
Manually distributed
(static)
5
3
6
4
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pool of Addresses Distributed
by MacIP and DHCP
Block of IP host addresses
(derived from network IP
address + mask issued by ISP)
The figure above shows an example of a block of IP addresses being
distributed correctly.
The example follows these rules:
■
An IP address must not be used as a static address if it is also
in a range of addresses being distributed by DHCP or MacIP.
■
A single IP address range is used by all the address-served
clients. These include DHCP, BOOTP, MacIP, and WAN clients,
even though BOOTP and static MacIP clients might not be
considered served.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-12
Reference Guide
■
■
The address range specified for address-served clients cannot
wrap around from the end of the total available range back to
the beginning. See below for a further explanation and an
example.
The network address issued by an ISP cannot be used as a
host address.
A DHCP example
Suppose, for example, that your ISP gave your network the IP
address 199.1.1.32, and a 4-bit subnet mask. Address 199.1.1.32
is reserved as the network address. Address 199.1.1.47 is
reserved as the broadcast address. This leaves 14 addresses to
allocate, from 199.1.1.33 through 199.1.1.46. If you want to
allocate a sub-block of 10 addresses using DHCP, enter “10” in the
DHCP Setup screen’s Number of Addresses to Allocate item. Then,
in the same screen’s First Address item, enter the first address in
the sub-block to allocate such that all 10 addresses are within your
original block. You could enter 199.1.1.33, or 199.1.1.37, or any
address between them. Note that if you entered 199.1.1.42 as the
first address, network routing errors would probably result because
you would be using a range with addresses that do not belong to
your network (199.1.1.49, 199.1.1.50, and 199.1.1.51).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing
B-13
Nested IP subnets
Under certain situations, you may wish to
create remote subnets from the limited
number of IP addresses issued by your ISP
or other authority. You can do this using
connection profiles. These subnets can be
nested within the range of IP addresses
avaiilable to your network.
Internet
For example, suppose that you obtain the
Class C network address a.b.c.0 to be
distributed among three networks. This
network address can be used on your main
network while portions of it can be
a.b.c.16
a.b.c.1
Router A
subnetted to the two remaining networks.
a.b.c.0
a.b.c.2
Note: The IP address a.b.c.0 has letters in
place of the first three numbers to generalize
it for this example.
The figure at left shows a possible network
configuration following this scheme. The
main network is set up with the Class C
address a.b.c.0, and contains Router A
(which could be a Netopia Router), a Netopia
Router, and a number of other hosts. Router
A maintains a link to the Internet, and may
be used as the default gateway.
Router B
Router C
Routers B and C (which could also be
a.b.c.248
a.b.c.249
a.b.c.128
a.b.c.129
Netopia Routers) serve the two remote
networks that are subnets of a.b.c.0. The
subnetting is accomplished by configuring
the Netopia Router with connection profiles
for Routers B and C (see the following table).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-14
Reference Guide
Bits available for host
address
Connection profile
Remote IP address
Remote IP mask
for Router B
for Router C
a.b.c.128
a.b.c.248
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.248
7
3
The Netopia Router’s connection profiles for Routers B and C create
entries in its IP routing table. One entry points to the subnet
a.b.c.128, while a second entry points to the subnet a.b.c.248. The
IP routing table might look similar to the following:
IP Routing Table
Network Address-Subnet Mask-----via
Router------Port--Age--------Type------
----------------------------------SCROLL
UP--------------------------------
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
a.b.c.1
WAN 3719
Management
127.0.0.1
a.b.c.128
a.b.c.248
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.248
127.0.0.1
a.b.c.128
a.b.c.248
lp1 6423
WAN 5157
WAN 6205
Local
Local
Local
---------------------------------SCROLL
DOWN-------------------------------
UPDATE
Let’s see how a packet from the Internet gets routed to the host
with IP address a.b.c.249, which is served by Router C. The packet
first arrives at Router A, which delivers it to its local network
(a.b.c.0). The packet is then received by the Netopia Router, which
examines its destination IP address.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding IP Addressing
B-15
The Netopia Router compares the packet’s destination IP address
with the routes in its IP routing table. It begins with the route at the
bottom of the list and works up until there’s a match or the route to
the default gateway is reached.
When a.b.c.249 is masked by the first route’s subnet mask, it
yields a.b.c.248, which matches the network address in the route.
The Netopia Router uses the connection profile associated with the
route to connect to Router C, and then forwards the packet. Router
C delivers the packet to the host on its local network.
The following diagram illustrates the IP address space taken up by
the two remote IP subnets. You can see from the diagram why the
term nested is appropriate for describing these subnets.
1
Address range
available to
a.b.c.0, less
the two nested
subnets
128
addresses used
by a.b.c.128
192
248
addresses used
by a.b.c.248
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B-16
Reference Guide
Broadcasts
As mentioned earlier, binary IP host or subnet addresses composed
entirely of ones or zeros are reserved for broadcasting. A broadcast
packet is a packet that is to be delivered to every host on the
network, if both the host address and the subnet address are all ones
or all zeros, or to every host on the subnetwork, if the host address is
all ones or all zeros but the subnet address is a combination or zeros
and ones. Instead of making many copies of the packet, individually
addressed to different hosts, all the host machines know to pay
attention to broadcast packets, as well as to packets addressed to
their specific individual host addresses. Depending on the age and
type of IP equipment you use, broadcasts will be addressed using
either all zeros or all ones, but not both. If your network requires zeros
broadcasting, you must configure this through SNMP.
Packet header types
As previously mentioned, IP works with other protocols to allow
communication over IP networks. When IP is used on an Ethernet
network, IP works with the Ethernet or 802.3 framing standards,
among other protocols. These two protocols specify two different
ways to organize the very first signals in the sequence of electrical
signals that make up an IP packet travelling over Ethernet. When you
install and configure the Netopia Router to be an AppleTalk–IP
gateway, you must specify whether it should use Ethernet or 802.3. If
you do not know which to use, see the documentation provided with
your IP computers, or talk with your IP network manager or the vendor
of your IP equipment. By default, the Netopia Router uses Ethernet
packet headers for IP traffic. If your network requires 802.3 IP
framing, you must configure this through SNMP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-1
Appendix C
ISDN Configuration Guide
This appendix contains supplemental ISDN configuration
information.
Definitions
The following terms are used in this appendix:
Directory number: The actual phone number associated with the
ISDN line you order. Depending on the type of switch protocol used
on your line, there may be one directory number for both
B-channels, or one for each B-channel.
SPID: The Service Profile ID generally looks like the directory
number with some extra digits (the TID) appended to it. SPIDs are
used only in North America. The number of SPIDs received from your
ISDN service provider can vary from none to two.
TID (Terminal ID): This one- or two-digit number is associated with
the SPID. It’s usually 1 or 01 for the first SPID and 2 or 02 for the
second SPID, but it can vary in form. You may need to add a TID to
each SPID you use when you configure the Netopia Router.
If you encounter other unfamiliar terms, check the glossary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-2
Reference Guide
About SPIDs
Depending on the type of ISDN switch protocol you use, you may be
required to enter SPIDs in the ISDN Line Configuration screen.
Generally, SPIDs are used with North American (United States and
Canada) switch protocols.
The exact format of ISDN SPIDs is sometimes a point of confusion.
This is because several formats exist, and some formats allow
variations.
The table below displays the general SPID formats for the types of
North American ISDN switch protocols supported by the Netopia
Router. The formats shown are a subset of possible SPID formats,
but in most cases they should work.
In the following table, xxxxxxx represents the directory number
assigned to your ISDN line, and yyy represents your area code.
Switch
SPID format
AT&T 5ESS cus-
tom (multipoint)
01xxxxxxx0
yyyxxxxxxx1 and yyyxxxxxxx2
or
yyyxxxxxxx01 and yyyxxxxxxx02
Northern Telecom
DMS-100 custom
National ISDN-1
on AT&T 5ESS
(multipoint)
01xxxxxxx000
National ISDN-1
on Northern
yyyxxxxxxx100 and yyyxxxxxxx200
or
Telecom DMS-100
yyyxxxxxxx0100 and yyyxxxxxxx0101
Note: AT&T 5ESS custom point-to-point switches have no SPIDs
and are not represented in the table above. However, this type of
switch configuration is supported by the Netopia Router.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISDN Configuration Guide
C-3
Example SPIDs
If your ISDN line is controlled by a DMS-100 switch using National
ISDN-1, and your directory numbers are given as (415)234-5678
and (415)234-5679, your SPIDs are 4152345678010 and
4152345679020. Alternately, your SPIDs can be
41523456780100 and 41523456790200.
Second directory number
The Add Connection Profile screen in the WAN Setup (Advanced
Configuration) now contains the item Optional Second Number. This
item should be filled in when the remote network (the network router
being called) has a separate directory number for each B-channel.
Switch-specific uses
In general, if the remote network has an ISDN line with an AT&T
5ESS switch, only one directory number is needed. However, the
remote network may be set up to require incoming calls to use
separate directory numbers for each B-channel. In this case, enter
the second directory number in the Optional Second Number item.
If the remote network has an ISDN line with a DMS-100 switch and
is not in a hunt group, it should have one directory number for each
B-channel. Both directory numbers are required by the Netopia
Router to make a connection to that network using two B-channels.
In this case, enter the second directory number in the Optional
Second Number item. If only one directory number is available in
this case, only one B-channel can be used when connecting to that
network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-4
Reference Guide
Backup number
Another use for the Optional Second Number item is for storing a
backup number in case a connection cannot be made using the
primary number. For example, if calling the primary number returns
a busy signal, the Netopia Router will attempt to use the secondary
number stored in Optional Second Number. If a connection also
cannot be made using the secondary number, see the event history
to determine the problem and its solution. See Appendix E, “Leased
line and ISDN Events”, for more information.
If the remote network's directory number is part of a hunt group, a
second directory number may not be necessary to make a
successful connection using two B-channels.
Dynamic B-channel usage
If the B-Channel Usage item in a connection profile’s PPP/ MP
Options screen is set to Dynamic or 2 B, Pre-emptible, one or both
B channels may be in use at any time during a call made with that
connection profile. Use of the second B-channel depends on traffic
volume.
In addition, one of the B-channels may be relinquished if there is an
incoming call, or if a second outgoing connection is made using
another connection profile.
The ability to allow incoming calls when both B-channels are in use
depends on the type of switch protocol on the local ISDN line, and
how that line is provisioned (configured). Some types of switch
protocols never allow incoming calls when both B-channels are in
use. Switch protocols that do allow incoming calls must have the
additional call offering (ACO) parameter turned on for data. ACO for
data is off by default.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISDN Configuration Guide
C-5
The table below shows which supported switch types can allow an
incoming call when ACO for data is on.
Type of switch:
AT&T 5ESS custom
Incoming call allowed?
N/ A
Yes
AT&T 5ESS National ISDN-1
DMS-100 custom
Yes*
Yes*
DMS-100 National ISDN-1
* Must have two directory numbers assigned.
This table may not be a complete list of switch protocols that
support ACO. To find out if your switch protocol supports ACO, or to
turn ACO on, contact your ISDN service provider.
Other incoming call restrictions
A B-channel will not be relinquished to admit an incoming call if a
connection profile has B-Channel Usage set to 2 B-Channels.
A B-channel will not be relinquished to admit an incoming call when
there are two separate concurrent calls. Incoming calls are
automatically allowed in when there is at least one B-channel free.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C-6
Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-1
Appendix D
ISDN, DDS/ADN, and T1 Events
This appendix is a complete list of the leased line and ISDN events
that can appear in the Netopia Router’s event histories. The text
that appears in a history is shown in bold, followed by a brief
explanation and the parameters associated with the event.
You can display more information about any event simply by
selecting it in the Event History and pressing Return. See the
example Event History shown below.
Device Event History
Current Date --
6/4/97 09:23:53 AM
-Date-----Time-----Event------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------SCROLL UP-----------------------------------
06/04/97 08:56:13
06/04/97 08:56:06
06/04/97 08:56:06
AppleTalk initialization complete
IPX initialization complete
IP address server initialization complete
06/04/97 08:56:06 --BOOT: Cold start------------------------------------------
06/04/97 08:52:28 AURP initialization complete
---------------------------------SCROLL DOWN----------------------------------
Return/Enter on event item for details or 'SCROLL [UP/DOWN]' item for
scrolling.
For example, if you selected a Disconnect Requested event that
occurred at 19:43:01 and pressed Return, the following screen
would appear:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-2
Reference Guide
+------------------------EVENT DETAILS----------------------+
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 19:40:04 on Friday, July 23, 1999
| Disconnect Requested
| Called #: 914152270188; Cause: 16
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
Leased line events
ISDN events
WAN data link activated at X Kbps: Indicates leased line is active
at the specified speed (X).
WAN data link deactivated: Indicates leased line is not active.
ISDN Port Init: ISDN port has been initialized.
ISDN Line Active: ISDN L1 active - L1 not ready to carry L2 data.
Associated parameter: switch type or protocol.
SPID Initialized: SPID accepted by switch. Associated parameter:
directory number associated with SPID.
SPID Failed: SPID rejected/ removed by switch. Associated
parameter: directory number associated with SPID.
ISDN Line Deactivated: ISDN L1 not active - L1 not ready to carry
L2 data. Associated parameter: switch type or protocol.
Received Clear Confirmation for our DN: Received clear
confirmation from switch. Associated parameter: called directory
number.
Received Clear Ind. from DN: Received clear indication from switch.
Associated parameter: called directory number. Secondary
associated parameter: cause code.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISDN, DDS/ADN, and T1 Events
D-3
Connection Confirmed to our DN: Received connect confirmation
for Connect Request sent to the switch. Associated parameter:
called directory number.
Received Connect Ind. for DN: Received connect indication for Call
Request sent to the switch. Associated parameter: called directory
number.
Received Disc. Ind. from DN: Received disconnect indication from
switch. Associated parameter: called directory number. Secondary
associated parameter: cause code.
Received Setup Ind. from DN: Received call indication from switch.
Associated parameter: called directory number.
Issued Setup Request from our DN: Call request was sent to
switch. Associated parameter: called directory number.
Requested Connect to our DN: Connect request for the received
call was sent to the switch. Associated parameter: called directory
number.
Issued Clear Request for our DN: Clear request was sent to the
switch. Associated parameter: called directory number.
Issued Clear Response to DN: Clear response was sent to the
switch. Associated parameter: called directory number.
Disconnect Reqested: Disconnect request was sent to switch.
Associated parameter: called directory number. Secondary associ-
ated parameter: cause code.
ISDN event cause codes
These codes appear as associated (secondary) parameters in some
of the ISDN events.
Cause No. 1: unallocated (unassigned number). This cause
indicates that the destination requested by the calling user cannot
be reached because, although the number is in a valid format, it is
not currently assigned (allocated).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-4
Reference Guide
Cause No. 2: no route to specified transit network. This cause
indicates that the equipment sending this cause has received a
request to route the call through a particular transit network which it
does not recognize. The equipment sending this cause does not
recognize the transit network either because the transit network
does not exist or because that particular network, while it does
exist, does not serve the equipment that is sending this cause.
This cause is supported on a network-dependent basis.
Cause No. 3: no route to destination. This cause indicates that
the called user cannot be reached because the network through
which the call has been routed does not serve the destination
desired.
This cause is supported on a network-dependent basis.
Cause No. 6: channel unacceptable. This cause indicates that the
channel used in this call is not acceptable to the sending entity.
Cause No.7: call awarded and being delivered in an established
channel. This cause indicates that the user is receiving an incoming
call, which is being connected to a channel already used by that
user for similar calls (e.g., packet-mode X.25 virtual calls).
Cause No. 16: normal call clearing. This cause indicates that the
call is being cleared because one of the users involved in the call
has requested that the call be cleared.
Under normal situations, the source of this cause is not the
network.
Cause No. 17: user busy. This cause is used when the called user
has indicated the inability to accept another call.
It is noted that the user equipment is compatible with call.
Cause No. 18: no user responding. This cause is used when a
user does not respond to a call establishment message with either
an alerting or connect indication within the prescribed period of time
allocated (defined in Recommendation Q.931 by the expiry of either
timer T303 or T310).
Cause No. 19: no answer from user (user alerted). This cause is
used when a user has provided an alerting indication but has not
provided a connect indication within a prescribed period of time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISDN, DDS/ADN, and T1 Events
D-5
This cause is not necessarily generated by Q.931 procedures but
may be generated by internal network timers.
Cause No. 21: call rejected. This cause indicates that the
equipment sending this cause does not wish to accept this call,
although it could have accepted the call because the equipment
sending this cause is neither busy nor incompatible.
Cause No. 22: number changed. This cause is returned to a calling
user when the called party number indicated by the calling user is
no longer assigned. The new called party number may optionally be
included in the diagnostic field. If a network does not support this
capability, cause No. 1, unassigned (unallocated) number, shall be
used.
Cause No. 26: non-selected user clearing. This cause indicates
that the specified user has not been awarded the incoming call.
Cause No. 27: destination out of order. This cause indicates that
the destination indicated by the user cannot be reached because
the interface to the destination is not functioning correctly. The term
“not functioning correctly” indicates that a signaling message was
unable to be delivered to the remote user: e.g., a physical layer or
data link layer failure at the remote user, user equipment off-line,
etc.
Cause No. 28: invalid number format (address incomplete). This
cause indicates that the called user cannot be reached because the
called party number is not a valid format or is not complete.
Cause No. 29: facility rejected. This cause is returned when a
facility requested by the user cannot be provided by the network.
Cause No. 30: response to STATUS INQUIRY. This cause is
included in the STATUS message when the reason for generated the
STATUS message was the prior receive of a STATUS INQUIRY
message.
Cause No. 31: normal, unspecified. This cause is used to report a
normal even only when no other cause in the normal class applies.
Cause No. 34: no circuit/ channel available. This cause indicates
that there is no appropriate circuit/ channel presently available to
handle the call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-6
Reference Guide
Cause No. 38: network out of order. This cause indicates that the
network is not functioning correctly and that the condition is likely to
last a relatively long period of time: e.g., immediately reattempting
the call is not likely to be successful.
Cause No. 41: temporary failure. This cause indicates that the
network is not functioning correctly and that the condition is not
likely to last a long period of time: e.g., the user may wish to try
another call attempt almost immediately.
Cause No. 42: switching equipment congestion. This cause
indicates that the switching equipment generating this cause is
experiencing a period of high traffic.
Cause No. 43: access information discarded. This cause indicates
that the network could not deliver access information to the remote
user as requested: i.e., user-to-user information, low layer
compatibility, high layer compatibility, or a sub-address as indicated
in the diagnostic.
It is noted that the particular type of access information discarded
is optionally included in the diagnostic.
Cause No. 44: requested circuit/ channel not available. This
cause is returned when the circuit or channel indicated by the
requesting entity cannot be provided by the other side of the
interface.
Cause No. 47: resource unavailable, unspecified. This cause is
used to report a resource unavailable event only when no other
cause in the resource unavailable class applies.
Cause No 49: Quality of Service not available. This cause is used
to report that the requested Quality of Service, as defined in
Recommendation X.213, cannot be provided (e.g., throughput or
transit delay cannot be supported).
Cause No. 50: requested facility not subscribed. This cause
indicates that the requested supplementary service could not be
provided by the network because the user has not completed the
necessary administrative arrangements with its supporting
networks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISDN, DDS/ADN, and T1 Events
D-7
Cause No 57: bearer capability not authorized. This cause
indicates that the user has requested a bearer capability
implemented by the equipment that generated this cause that the
user is not authorized to use.
Cause No. 58: bearer capability not presently available. This
cause indicates that the user has requested a bearer capability
implemented by the equipment that generated this cause which is
not available at this time.
Cause No 63: service or option not available, unspecified. This
cause is used to report a service or option not available event only
when no other cause in the service or option not available class
applies.
Cause No. 65: bearer capability not implemented. This cause
indicates that the equipment sending this cause does not support
the bearer capability requested.
Cause No. 66: channel type not implemented. This cause
indicates that the equipment sending this cause does not support
the channel type requested.
Cause No. 69: requested facility not implemented. This cause
indicates that the equipment sending this cause does not support
the requested supplementary service.
Cause No. 70: only restricted digital information bearer capability
is available. This cause indicates that a device has requested an
unrestricted bearer service but the equipment sending this cause
only supports the restricted version of the requested bearer
capability.
Cause No. 79: service or option not implemented, unspecified.
This cause is used to report a service or option not implemented
event only when no other cause in the service or option not
implemented class applies.
Cause No. 81: invalid call reference value. This cause indicates
that the equipment sending this cause has received a message with
a call reference which is not currently in use on the user-network
interface.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-8
Reference Guide
Cause No. 82: identified channel does not exist. This cause
indicates that the equipment sending this cause has received a
request to use a channel not activated on the interface for a call.
For example, if a user has subscribed to those channels on a
primary rate interface numbered from 1 to 12 and the user
equipment or the network attempts to use channels 13 through 23,
this cause is generated.
Cause No. 83: a suspended call exists, but this call identify does
not. This cause indicates that a call resume has been attempted
with a call identity which differs from that in use for any presently
suspended call(s).
Cause No. 84: call identity in use. This cause indicates that the
network has received a call suspend request. The call suspend
request contained a call identity (including the null call identity)
which is already in use for a suspended call within the domain of
interfaces over which the call might be resumed.
Cause No. 85: no call suspended. This call indicates that the
network has received a call resume request. The call resume
request contained a call identity information element that presently
does not indicate any suspended call within the domain interfaces
over which calls may be resumed.
Cause No. 86: call having the requested call identity has been
cleared. This cause indicates that the network has received a call
resume request. The call resume request contained a call identity
information element that once indicated a suspended call; however,
that suspended call was cleared while suspended (either by network
timeout or by remote user).
Cause No. 88: incompatible destination. This cause indicates that
the equipment sending this cause has received a request to
establish a call that has a low layer compatibility, high layer
compatibility, or other compatibility attributes (e.g., data rate) that
cannot be accommodated.
Cause No. 91: invalid transit network selection. This cause
indicates that a transit network identification of an incorrect format
as defined in Annex C/ Q.931 was received.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISDN, DDS/ADN, and T1 Events
D-9
Cause No. 95: invalid message, unspecified. This cause is used
to report an invalid message event only when no other cause in the
invalid message class applies.
Cause No. 96: mandatory information element is missing. This
cause indicates that the equipment sending this cause has received
a message that is missing an information element that must be
present in the message before that message can be processed.
Cause No. 97: message type non-existent or not implemented.
This cause indicates that the equipment sending this cause has
received a message with a message type it does not recognize
either because this is a message not defined or defined but not
implemented by the equipment sending this cause.
Cause No. 98: message not compatible with call state or mes-
sage type non-existent or not implemented. This cause indicates
that the equipment sending this cause has received a message
such that the procedures do not indicate that this is a permissible
message to receive while in the call state, or a STATUS message
was received indicating an incompatible call state.
Cause No. 99: information element non-existent or not imple-
mented. This cause indicates that the equipment sending this
cause has received a message that includes information elements
not recognized because the information element identifier is not
defined or it is defined but not implemented by the equipment
sending the cause. However, the information element is not
required to be present in the message in order for the equipment
sending the cause to process the message.
Cause No. 100: invalid information element contents. This cause
indicates that the equipment sending this cause has received an
information element which it has implemented; however, one or
more of the fields in the information element are coded in a way
that has not been implemented by the equipment sending this
cause.
Cause No 101: message not compatible with call state. This
cause indicates that a message has been received that is
incompatible with the call state.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D-10 Reference Guide
Cause No. 102: recovery on timer expiry. This cause indicates
that a procedure has been initiated by the expiry of a timer in
association with Q.931 error handling procedures.
Cause No. 111: protocol error, unspecified. This cause is used to
report a protocol error event only when no other cause in the
protocol error class applies.
Cause No. 127: interworking, unspecified. This cause indicates
there has been interworking with a network that does not provide
causes for actions it takes; thus, the precise cause for a message
being sent cannot be ascertained.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-1
Appendix E
Further Reading
Angell, David. ISDN for Dummies, Foster City, CA: IDG Books
Worldwide, 1995. Thorough introduction to ISDN for beginners.
Black, Uyless. Emerging Communications Technologies, Englewood
Cliffs, New Jersey: PTR Prentice Hall, 1994. Describes how
emerging communications technologies, including ISDN and Frame
Relay operate and where they fit in a computer/ communications
network.
Chapman, D. Brent and Elizabeth D. Zwicky. Building Internet
Firewalls, Sebastopol, CA: O’Reilly & Associates, 1995. Dense and
technical, but Chapter 6 provides a basic introduction to packet
filtering.
Chapman, D. Brent. “Network (In)Security Through IP Packet
Filtering,” paper available from Great Circle Associates, 1057 West
Dana Street, Mountain View, CA 94041
Garfinkel, Simson. PGP: Pretty Good Privacy, Sebastopol, CA:
O’Reilly & Associates, 1991. A guide to the free data encryption
program PGP and the issues surrounding encryption.
Levine, John R. and Carol Baroudi. The Internet for Dummies, Foster
City, CA: IDG Books Worldwide, 1993. Covers all of the most popular
Internet services, including e-mail, newsgroups, and the World Wide
Web. Also has information on setting up individual workstations with
TCP/ IP stacks.
Miller, A. Mark. Analyzing Broadband Networks (Frame Relay, SMDS,
& ATM), M&T Books: A Division of MIS: Press, 1994. An
intermediate/ advanced reference on Frame Relay technologies.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-2
Reference Guide
Siyan, Karanjit. Internet Firewall and Network Security, Indianapolis:
New Riders Publishing, 1995. Similar to the Chapman and Zwicky
book.
Smith, Philip. Frame Relay Principles and Applications,
Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1996. Covers information on
Frame Relay, including the pros and cons of the technology,
description of the theory and application, and an explanation of the
standardization process.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary GL-1
Glossary
Access Line: A communications line (e.g. circuit) interconnecting a
frame-relay-compatible device (DTE) to a frame-relay switch (DCE).
See also Trunk Line.
Access Rate (AR): The data rate of the user access channel. The
speed of the access channel determines how rapidly (maximum
rate) the end user can inject data into a frame relay network.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute): Devises and
proposes recommendations for international communications
standards. See also Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique
et Telephonique (CCITT).
AppleTalk: A comprehensive network system designed and
developed by Apple Computer, Inc. AppleTalk allows many different
types of computer systems, printers, and servers to communicate
on a variety of cabling schemes, including LocalTalk and Ethernet
cabling. In this manual, AppleTalk refers especially to the protocols
or rule sets that govern this communication.
AppleTalk address: A unique identifier for each device using
AppleTalk that allows information to be sent and received correctly.
An AppleTalk address always includes a network number wherever
two or more AppleTalk networks are connected together by routers.
AUI (Attachment Unit Interface): Usually refers to 15-pin D
connectors associated with Ethernet transceivers.
AURP (Apple Update-based Router Protocol): An enhanced
AppleTalk routing protocol. AURP provides improved support for
AppleTalk over wide area networks (WANs) and tunneling through
non-AppleTalk (IP) networks. AURP features include network number
remapping, clustering of remote network numbers, and hop count
reduction.
backbone: A network topology consisting of a single length of
cable with multiple network connection points.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-2
Reference Guide
Bandwidth: The range of frequencies, expressed in Kilobits per
second, that can pass over a given data transmission channel
within a frame relay network. The bandwidth determines the rate at
which information can be sent through a channel - the greater the
bandwidth, the more information that can be sent in a given amount
of time.
baud rate: The rate of the signaling speed of a transmission
medium.
Be (Excess Burst Size): The maximum amount of uncommitted data
(in bits) in excess of Bc that a frame relay network can attempt to
deliver during a time interval Tc. This data (Be) generally is delivered
with a lower probability than Bc. The network treats Be data as
discard eligible. See also Committed Burst Size (Bc ).
BECN (Backward Explicit Congestion Notification): A bit set by a
frame relay network to notify an interface device (DTE) that
congestion avoidance procedures should be initiated by the sending
device.
bit: A binary digit; the smallest unit of data in the binary counting
system. A bit has a value of either 0 or 1.
bits per second (bps): A measure of the actual data transmission
rate. The bps rate may be equal to or greater than the baud rate
depending on the modulation technique used to encode bits into
each baud interval. The correct term to use when describing modem
data transfer speeds.
bps: See bits per second.
branch: A length of cable in a star network that goes from the
center of the star to a wall jack.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-3
Bridge: A device that supports LAN-to-LAN communications.
Bridges may be equipped to provide frame relay support to the LAN
devices they serve. A frame-relay-capable bridge encapsulates LAN
frames in frame relay frames and feeds those frame relay frames to
a frame relay switch for transmission across the network. A
frame-relay-capable bridge also receives frame relay frames from
the network, strips the frame relay frame off each LAN frame, and
passes the LAN frame on to the end device. Bridges are generally
used to connect local area network (LAN) segments to other LAN
segments or to a wide area network (WAN). They route traffic on the
Level 2 LAN protocol (e.g., the Media Access Control address),
which occupies the lower sub layer of the LAN OSI data link layer.
See also Router.
broadcast: A network transaction that sends data to all hosts
connected to the network.
Burstiness: In the context of a frame relay network, data that uses
bandwidth only sporadically; that is, information that does not use
the total bandwidth of a circuit 100 percent of the time. During
pauses, channels are idle; and no traffic flows across them in either
direction. Interactive and LAN-to-LAN data is bursty in nature,
because it is sent intermittantly, and in between data transmission
the channel experiences idle time waiting for the DTEs to respond to
the transmitted data user’s input of waiting for the user to send
more data.
byte: A group of bits, normally eight, which represent one data
character.
CallerID: See CND.
CCITT (Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et
Telephonique): International Consultative Committee for Telegraphy
and Telephony, a standards organization that devises and proposes
recommendations for international communications. See also ANSI
(American National Standards Institute).
Channel: Generically refers to the user access channel across
which frame relay data travels. Within a given T1 or E1 physical line,
a channel can be one of the following, depending on how the line is
configured.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-4
Reference Guide
Unchannelized
The entire T1/ E1 line is considered a channel, where:
Ⅲ
The T1 line operates at speeds of 1.536 Mbps and is a
signle channel consisting of 24 T1 time slots.
Ⅲ
The E1 line operates at speeds of 1.984 Mbps and is a
single channel consisting of 20 E1 time slots.
Channelized
The channel is any one of N time slots within a given line,
where:
Ⅲ
The T1 line consists of any one or more channels. Each
channel is any one of 24 time slots. The T1 line operates
at speeds in multiples of multiples of 56/ 64 Kbps to
1.536 Mbps, with aggregate speed not exceeding 1.536
Mbps.
Ⅲ
The E1 line consists of one or more channels. Each
channel is any one of 31 time slots. The E1 line operates
at speeds in multiples of 64 Kbps to 1.984 Mbps, with
aggregate speed not exceeding 1.984 Mbps.
Fractional
The T1/ E1 channel is one of the following groupings of
consecutively or nonconsecutively assigned time slots:
Ⅲ
N T/ 1 time slots (NX56/ 64Kbps where N=1 to 23 T1 time
slots per Ft1 channel).
Ⅲ
N E1 time slots (NX64Kbps, where N = 1 to 30 time slots
per E1 channel).
Channel Service Unit (CSU): An ancillary device needed to adapt
the V.35 interface on a Frame Relay DTE to the T1 (or E1) interface
on a frame relay switch. The T1 (or E1) signal format on the frame
relay switch is not compatible with the V.35 interface on the DTE:
therefore, a CSU or similar device, placed between the DTE and the
frame relay switch, is needed to perform the required conversion.
CHAP (challenge handshake protocol): A method for ensuring
secure network access and communications.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-5
Class A, B, and C networks: The values assigned to the first few
bits in an IP network address determine which class designation the
network has. In decimal notation, Class A network addresses range
from 1.X.X.X to 126.X.X.X, Class B network addresses range from
128.1.X.X to 191.254.X.X, and Class C addresses range from
192.0.1.X to 223.255.254.X. For more information on IP network
address classes, see Appendix C, “Understanding IP Addressing.”
client: An intelligent workstation that makes requests to other
computers known as servers. PC computers on a LAN can be
clients.
clustering: A feature that clusters remapped network numbers into
a range of sequential network numbers.
CNA (Calling Number Authentication): A security feature that will
reject an incoming call if it does not match the Calling Number field
in one of the Netopia ISDN Router’s Connection Profiles.
CND (Calling Number Delivery): Also known as caller ID, a feature
that allows the Called Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) to
receive a calling party’s directory number during the call
establishment phase.
Committed Burst Size (Bc): The maximum amount of data (in bits)
that the network agrees to transfer, under normal conditions, during
a time interval Tc. See also Excess Burst Size (Be).
Committed Information Rate (CIR): The committed rate (in bits per
second) at which the ingress access interface trunk interfaces, and
egress access interface of a frame relay network transfer
information to the destination frame relay end system under normal
conditions. The rate is averaged over a minimum time interval Tc.
Committed Rate Measurement Interval (Tc): The time interval
during which the user can send only a Bc-committed amount of the
traffic. Tc is computed (from the subscription parameters of CIR and
Bc) as Tc = Bc/ CIR. Tc is not a periodic time interval. Instead, it is
used only to measure incoming data, during which it acts like a
sliding window. Incoming data triggers the Tc interval, which
continues until it completes its commuted duration. See also
Committed Information Rate (CIR) and Committed Burst Size (Bc).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-6
Reference Guide
community strings: Sequences of characters that serve much like
passwords for devices using SNMP. Different community strings
may be used to allow an SNMP user to gather device information or
change device configurations.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check): A computational means to
ensure the accuracy of frames transmitted between devices in a
frame relay network. The mathematical function is computed, before
the frame is transmitted at the originating device. Its numerical
value is computed based on the content of the frame. This value is
compared with a recomputed value of the function at the destination
device. See also FCS (Frame Check Sequence).
CSV (Circuit Switched Voice): Also know as Data-Over-Voice, a
feature that allows data calls to be placed or answered using ISDN
speech grade bearer capabilities.
DCE (Data Communications Equipment): Term defined by both
frame relay and X.25 committees, that applies to switching
equipment and is distinquished from the devices that attach to the
network (DTE). Also see DTE.
DDP (Datagram Delivery Protocol): Defines socket-to-socket
delivery of datagrams over an AppleTalk internet.
DE (Discard Eligibility): A user-set bit indicating that a frame may
be discarded in preference to other frames if congestion occurs, to
maintain the committed quality of service within the network.
Frames with the DE bit set are considered Be excess data. See also
Excess burst Size (Be).
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment): Term defined by both frame relay
and X.25 committees that applies to switching equipment and is
distinguished from the devices that attach to the DCE because pins
2 and 3 are reversed. Also see DCE.
default zone: When a Phase II EtherTalk network includes
more than one zone, all routers on that network must be configured
to assign one of these zones as a default zone. The default zone is
temporarily assigned to any Phase II EtherTalk node that hasn’t
chosen a zone. The user may choose another zone by opening the
Network Control Panel, selecting the correct physical connection,
and then choosing a zone in the scrolling field displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-7
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol): A service that lets
clients on a LAN request configuration information, such as IP host
addresses, from a server.
DLCI (Data Link Control Identifier): A unique number assigned to
a PVC end point in a frame relay network. Identifies a particular PVC
endpoint within a user’s access channel in a frame relay network.
DNS (Domain Name Service): A TCP/ IP protocol for discovering
and maintaining network resource information distributed among
different servers.
download: The process of transferring a file from a server to a
client.
E1: Transmission rate of 2.048 Mbps on E1 communications lines.
An E1 facility carries a 2.048 Mbps digital signal. See also T1 and
channel.
Egress: Frame Relay frames leaving a frame relay network in the
direction toward the destination device. Contrast with Ingress.
Encapsulation: A process by which an interface device places an
end devices protocol-specific frames inside a frame relay frame. The
network accepts only frames formatted specifically for frame relay;
hence, interface devices acting as interfaces to a frame relay
network must perform encapsulation. See also Interface device or
Frame-Relay-Capable Interface Device.
End-Device: The ultimate source or destination of data flowing
through a frame relay network sometime referred to as a Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE). As a source device, it sends data to an
interface device for encapsulation in a frame relay frame. As a
destination device, it receives de-encapsulated data (i.e., the frame
relay frame is stripped off, leaving only the user’s data) from the
interface device. Also see DCE. NOTE: An end device can be an
application program or some operator-controlled device (e.g.,
workstation). In a LAN environment, the end device could be a file
server or host.
Ethernet: A networking protocol that defines a type of LAN
characterized by a 10 Mbps (megabits per second) data rate.
Ethernet is used in many mainframe, PC, and UNIX networks, as
well as for EtherTalk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-8
Reference Guide
Ethernet address: Sometimes referred to as a hardware address.
A 48-bits long number assigned to every Ethernet hardware device.
Ethernet addresses are usually expressed as 12-character
hexadecimal numbers, where each hexadecimal character (0
through F) represents four binary bits. Do not confuse the Ethernet
address of a device with its network address.
EtherTalk: Apple’s data-link software that allows an AppleTalk
network to be connected by Ethernet cables. EtherTalk is a protocol
within the AppleTalk protocol set. Two versions of EtherTalk are in
common use, designated as Phase I and Phase II EtherTalk.
extended network: A network using AppleTalk Phase II protocols;
EtherTalk 2.0 and TokenTalk are extended networks. LocalTalk
networks are compatible with Phase II but are not extended
because a single LocalTalk network cannot have multiple network
numbers or multiple zone names.
FCS (Frame Check Sequence): The standard 16-bit cyclic
redundancy check used for HDLC and frame relay frames. The FCS
detects bit errors occurring in the bits of the frame between the
opening flag and the FCS, and is only effective in detecting errors in
frames no larger than 4096 octets. See also CRC (Cyclic
Redundancy Check.
FECN (Forward Explicit Congestion Notification): A bit set by a
frame relay network to notify an interface device (DTE) that
congestion avoidance procedures should be initiated by the
receiving device. See also BECN.
Filer Server: In the context of a frame relay network supporting
LAN-to-LAN communications, a device connecting a series of
workstations within a given LAN. The device performs error recovery
and flow control functions as well as end-to-end acknowledgement
of data during data transfer, thereby significantly reducing overhead
within the frame relay network.
firmware: System software stored in a device’s memory that
controls the device. The Netopia ISDN Router’s firmware can be
updated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-9
Frame-Relay-Capable Interface Device: A communications device
that performs encapsulation. frame-Relay-capable reouters and
bridges are examples of interface devices used to interface the
customer’s equipment to a frame relay network. See also Inteface
Device and Encapsulation.
Frame Relay Frame: A variable-length unit of data, in frame-relay
format that is transmitted through a frame relay network as pure
data. Contrast with Packet. See also Q.922A.
Frame Relay Network: A telecommunications network based on
frame relay technology. Data is multiplexed. In contrast with a
Packet-Switching Network.
gateway: A device that connects two or more networks that use
different protocols. Gateways provide address translation services,
but do not translate data. Gateways must be used in conjunction
with special software packages that allow computers to use
networking protocols not originally designed for them.
hard seeding: A router setting. In hard seeding, if a router that has
just been reset detects a network number or zone name conflict
between its configured information and the information provided by
another router, it disables the router port for which there is a
conflict. See also non-seeding, seeding, seed router, and soft
seeding.
HDLC (High Level Data Link Control): A generic link-level
communications protocol developed by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO). HDLC manages
synchronous, code-transparent, serial information transfer over a
link connection. See also SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control).
header: In packets, a header is part of the envelope information
that surrounds the actual data being transmitted. In e-mail, a
header is usually the address and routing information found at the
top of messages.
hop: A single trunk line between two switches in a frame relay
network. An established PVC consists of a certain number of hops,
spanning the distance from the ingress access interface to the
egress access interface within the network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-10 Reference Guide
hop count: The number of routers a packet has gone through. If
there are six routers between source and destination nodes, the
hop count for the packet will be six when it arrives at its destination
node. The maximum allowable hop count is usually 15.
hop count reduction: A feature of AURP supported by the Netopia
ISDN Router. Tunnels and point-to-point links over WANs can often
exceed the maximum allowable hop count of 15 routers. Network
administrators can use the hop count reduction feature to set up
tunnels and point-to-point links that exceed the 15-router limit.
host: A single, addressable device on a network. Computers,
networked printers, and routers are hosts.
Host Computer: A communications device that enables users to
run applications programs to perform such functions as text editing,
program execution, access to data bases, etc.
Ingress: Frame Relay frames from an access device toward the
frame relay network. Contrast with Egress.
Interface Device: Provides the interface between the end
device(s) and a frame relay network by encapsulating the user’s
native protocol in frame relay frames and sending the frames
across the frame relay backbone. See also Encapsulation and
Frame-Relay-Capable Interface Device.
internet: A set of networks connected together by routers. This is a
general term, not to be confused with the large, multi-organizational
collection of IP networks known as the Internet. An internet is
sometimes also known as an internetwork.
internet address, IP address: Any computing device that uses the
Internet Protocol (IP) must be assigned an internet or IP address.
This is a 32-bit number assigned by the system administrator,
usually written in the form of 4 decimal fields separated by periods,
e.g., 192.9.200.1. Part of the internet address is the IP network
number (IP network address), and part is the host address (IP host
address). All machines on a given IP network use the same IP
network number, and each machine has a unique IP host address.
The system administrator sets the subnet mask to specify how
much of the address is network number and how much is host
address. See also Class A, B, and C networks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-11
IP (Internet Protocol): A networking protocol developed for use on
computer systems that use the UNIX operating system. Often used
with Ethernet cabling systems. In this manual, IP is used as an
umbrella term to cover all packets and networking operations that
include the use of the Internet Protocol. See also TCP/ IP.
IP address, IP host address, IP network address: See internet
address.
IP broadcast: See broadcast.
IP tunneling: See AURP.
IPX (Internet Package Exchange): A protocol used by Novell
Netware networks.
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network): A method of
transmitting data digitally over telephone lines.
ISP (Internet service provider): A company that provides
Internet-related services. Most importantly, an ISP provides Internet
access services and products to other companies and consumers.
LAPB (Link Access Procedure Balanced): The balanced-mode,
enhanced version of HDLC. Used in X.25 packet-switching networks.
Contrast with LAPD.
LAPD (Link Access Procedure on the D-channel: A protocol that
operates at the data link layer (layer 2) of the OSI architecture.
LAPD is used to convey information between layer 3 entities across
the frame relay network. The D-channel carries signaling information
for circuit switching. Contrast with LAPB.
LAN (Local Area Network): A privately owned network that offers
high-speed communications channels to connect information
processing equipment in a limited geographic area.
LAN Protocols: A range of LAN protocols supported by a frame
relay network, including Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet
Protocol (TCP/ IP), AppleTalk, Xerox Network System (XNS),
Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX), and Common Operating System
used by DOS-based PCs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-12 Reference Guide
LAN Segment: In the context of a frame relay network supporting
LAN-to-LAN communications, a LAN linked to another LAN by a
bridge. Bridges enable two LANs to function like a single, large LAN
by passing data from one LAN segment to another. To communicate
with each other, the bridged LAN segments must use the same
native protocol. See also Bridge.
LocalTalk: The cabling specification for AppleTalk running at a
speed of 230.4 kbps (kilobits per second).
MacIP: A protocol in which IP packets are encapsulated within
AppleTalk headers, for transmission over AppleTalk networks. MacIP
requires the presence of at least one AppleTalk–IP gateway. MacIP
is usually used to allow an AppleTalk computer to communicate with
an IP computer.
MacIP client: A Macintosh computer that is using the MacIP
protocol to communicate with an IP computer.
MIB (Management Information Base): A standardized structure
for SNMP management information.
modem: A device used to convert digital signals from a computer
into analog signals that can be transmitted across standard analog
(not ISDN) telephone lines. Modem is a contraction of
modulator-demodulator.
NAT (Network Address Translation): A feature that allows
communication between the LAN connected to the Netopia ISDN
Router and the Internet using a single IP address, instead of having
a separate IP address for each computer on the network.
NetBIOS: A network communications protocol used on PC LANs.
network: A group of computer systems and other computer devices
that communicate with one another.
network administrator: A person who coordinates the design,
installation, and management of a network. A network administrator
is also responsible for troubleshooting and for adding new users to
the network.
network log: A record of the names of devices, location of wire
pairs, wall-jack numbers, and other information about the network.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-13
network number: A unique number for each network in an internet.
AppleTalk network numbers are assigned by seed routers, to which
the network is directly connected. An isolated AppleTalk network
does not need a network number.
network number remapping: Resolves network number conflicts
when two or more AppleTalk networks that may have duplicate
network numbers are connected together. The Netopia ISDN Router
lets you set up a range of network numbers into which remote
AppleTalk network numbers are remapped.
network range: A unique set of contiguous numbers associated
with an extended network; each number in a network range can be
associated with up to 253 node addresses.
node: See host.
non-seeding: A router setting that causes it to request network
number and zone information from any other routers on the network
connected to the non-seeding port. If it receives this information, it
begins to route packets through that port. See also hard seeding,
seeding, seed router, and soft seeding.
NT1: Local ISDN equipment that terminates an ISDN line. In most
countries, the NT1 is built into the ISDN wall jack. In the United
States and Canada, users must provide the NT1. See also S/ T
interface, U interface.
packet: A group of fixed-length binary digits, including the data and
call control signals, that are transmitted through an X.25
packet-switching network as a composite whole. The data, call
control signals, and possible error control information are arranged
in a predetermined format. Packets do not always travel the same
pathway but are arranged in proper sequence at the destination
side before forwarding the complete message to an addressee.
Contrast with Frame Relay Frame.
Packet-Switching Network: A telecommunications network based
on packet-switching technology, wherein a transmission channel is
occupied only for the duration of the transmission of the packet.
Contrast with Frame Relay Network.
PAP (PPP authentication protocol): A method for ensuring secure
network access.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-14 Reference Guide
Parameter: A numerical code that controls an aspect of terminal
and/ or network operation. Parameters control such aspects as
page size, data transmission speed, and timing options.
PC Card: A removable device, such as a modem or network
interface card, approximately the size of a credit card. Designed to
fit into a PC Card slot. Formerly called a PCMCIA card. See PC Card
slot.
PC Card slot: The slot designed to hold PC Cards. Formerly called a
PCMCIA slot. The Netopia ISDN Router has a PC Card port with two
PC Card slots.
PCMCIA: See PC Card.
PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit): A frame relay logical link, whose
endpoints and class of service are defined by network management.
Analogous to an X.25 permanent virtual circuit, a PVC consists of
the originating frame relay network element address, originating
data link control identifier, terminating frame relay network element
address, and termination data link control identifier. Originating
refers to the access interface from which the PVC is initiated.
Terminating refers to the access interface at which the PVC stops.
Many data network customers require a PVC between two points.
Data terminating equipment with a need for continuous
communications use PVCs. See also DLCI (Data Link Connection
Identifier.
port: A location for passing data in and out of a device, and, in
some cases, for attaching other devices or cables.
port number: A number that identifies a TCP/ IP-based service.
Telnet, for example, is identified with TCP port 23.
POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service): A service that connects
analog devices such as telephones, facsimile machines, or
modems to the Netopia ISDN Router and communicate over the
ISDN line.
PPP (Point to Point Protocol): A protocol for framing IP packets
and transmitting them over a serial line.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-15
protocol: A set of rules for communication, sometimes made up of
several smaller sets of rules also called protocols. AppleTalk is a
protocol that includes the LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and TokenTalk
protocols.
Q.922 A (Q.922 Annex A): The international draft standard that
defines the structure of frame relay frames. Based on the Q.922A
frame format developed by the CCITT. All frame relay frames
entering a frame relay network automatically confiorm to this
structure. Contrast with LAPB (Link Access Procedure Balanced).
Q.922 A Frame: A variable-length unit of data, formatted in
frame-relay (Q.922A) format, that is transmitted through a frame
relay network as pure data (i.e., it contains no flow control
information). Contrast with Packet. See also Frame Relay Frame.
remapping: See network number remapping.
RFC (Request for Comment): A series of documents used to
exchange information and standards about the Internet.
RIP (Routing Information Protocol): A protocol used for the
transmission of IP routing information.
RJ-11: A telephone-industry standard connector type, usually
containing four pins.
RJ-45: A telephone-industry standard connector type usually
containing eight pins.
router: A device that supports LAN-to-LAN communications. A
router can connect identical network types, such as
LocalTalk-to-LocalTalk, or dissimilar network types, such as
LocalTalk-to-Ethernet. However—unless a gateway is available—a
common protocol, such as AppleTalk, must be used over both
networks. Routers may be equipped to provide frame relay or ISDN
line support to the LAN devices they serve. A frame-relay-capable
router encapsulates LAN frames in frame relay frames and feeds
those frames to a frame relay switch for transmission across the
network. See also Bridge and gateway.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-16 Reference Guide
router port: A physical or logical connection between a router and
a network. Where a network only allows the use of one protocol,
each physical connection corresponds to one logical router port. An
example is the Netopia ISDN Router’s LocalTalk port. Where a
network allows the use of several protocols, each physical
connection may correspond to several logical router ports—one for
each protocol used. Each router port has its own network address.
routing table: A list of networks maintained by each router on an
internet. Information in the routing table helps the router determine
the next router to forward packets to.
seeding: A method for ensuring that two or more routers agree
about which physical networks correspond to which network
numbers and zone names. There are three options: non-seeding,
soft seeding, and hard seeding. Seeding can often be set separately
for each router port. See also hard seeding, non-seeding, seed
router, and soft seeding.
seed router: A router that provides network number and zone
information to any router that starts up on the same network. See
also hard seeding, non-seeding, seeding, and soft seeding.
serial port: A connector on the back of the workstation through
which data flows to and from a serial device.
server: A device or system that has been specifically configured to
provide a service, usually to a group of clients.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol): A protocol used
for communication between management consoles and network
devices. The Netopia ISDN Router can be managed through SNMP.
soft seeding: A router setting. In soft seeding, if a router that has
just been reset detects a network number or zone name conflict
between its configured information for a particular port and the
information provided by another router connected to that port, it
updates its configuration using the information provided by the other
router. See also hard seeding, non-seeding, seeding, and seed
router.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-17
Statistical Multiplexing: Interleaving the data input of two or more
devices on a single channel or access line for transmission through
a frame relay network. Interleaving of data is accomplished using
the DLCI.
S/ T interface: The interface on local ISDN equipment where the
connection to an NT1 or a properly terminated ISDN line is made.
The Netopia ISDN Router models 440-S/ T and 430-S/ T have S/ T
interfaces. See also NT1, U interface.
subnet: A network address created by using a subnet mask to
specify that a number of bits in an internet address will be used as
a subnet number rather than a host address.
subnet mask: A 32-bit number to specify which part of an internet
address is the network number, and which part is the host address.
When written in binary notation, each bit written as 1 corresponds
to 1 bit of network address information. One subnet mask applies
to all IP devices on an individual IP network.
SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control): A link-level
communications protocol used in an International Business
Machines (IBM) Systems Network Architecture (SNA) network that
manages synchronous, code-transparent, serial information transfer
over a link connection. SDLC is a subset of the more generic HDLC
(High-Level Data Link Control) protocol developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
T1: Transmission rate of 1.544 Mbps on T1 communications lines.
A T1 facility carries a 1.544 Mbps digital signal. Also referred to as
DS-1 (Digital Signal Level 1). See also E1 and channel.
TCP/ IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol): An
open network standard that defines how devices from different
manufacturers communicate with each other over one or more
interconnected networks. TCP/ IP protocols are the foundation of the
Internet, a worldwide network of networks connecting businesses,
governments, researchers, and educators.
telephone wall cable: 2-pair, 4-pair, or 8-pair, 22- or 24-gauge solid
copper wire cable. Telephone wall cable is sometimes called
telephone station cable or twisted-pair cable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-18 Reference Guide
TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol/ Internet Protocol): A
protocol used to transfer files between IP nodes. TFTP is often used
to transfer firmware and configuration information from a UNIX
computer acting as a TFTP server to an IP networking device, such
as the Netopia ISDN Router.
thicknet: Industry jargon for 10Base-5 coaxial cable, the original
Ethernet cabling.
thinnet: Industry jargon for 10Base-2 coaxial cable, which is
thinner (smaller in diameter) than the original Ethernet cabling.
Trunk Line: A communications line connecting two frame relay
switches to each other.
UDP (User Datagram Protocol): A TCP/ IP protocol describing how
packets reach applications in destination nodes.
U interface: The interface on local ISDN equipment where the
connection to the ISDN line is made. The Netopia ISDN Router’s U
interface is its ISDN (WAN) port.
wall jack: A small hardware component used to tap into telephone
wall cable. An RJ-11 wall jack usually has four pins; an RJ-45 wall
jack usually has eight pins.
WAN (wide area network): A network that consists of nodes
connected by long-distance transmission media, such as telephone
lines. WANs can span a state, a country, or even the world.
WAN IP: In addition to being a router, the Netopia ISDN Router is
also an IP address server. There are four protocols it can use to
distribute IP addresses over the WAN which include: DHCP, BOOTP,
IPCP and MacIP. WAN IP is a feature for both the Small Office and
Corporate Netopia ISDN Router models.
wiring closet: A central location where a building’s telephone and
network wiring is connected. Multi-story buildings often have a main
wiring closet in the basement and satellite wiring closets on each
floor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-19
zone: An arbitrary subset of nodes within an AppleTalk internet.
Creating multiple zones makes it easier for users to locate network
services. The network administrator defines zones when he or she
configures routers. Isolated networks have no zones. LocalTalk and
EtherTalk Phase I networks may have no more than one zone each.
EtherTalk Phase II and TokenTalk networks may have more than one
zone each. Several networks of any AppleTalk type may share a zone
name.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-20 Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GL-22 Reference Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IN-1
Index
10Base-5, connecting 8
10Base-T 7
10Base-T, connecting 7
2 B Channels 26
receiving connections 14
64 Kbps 30
AURP tunnel 29
A
answer profile
B
tunneling (AURP) 4, 12
cause codes, ISDN event 3
Change Static Route 15
CHAP
AppleTalk routing table 13
AppleTalk setup 1
AppleTalk Update-Based Routing Proto-
col, see AURP
and answer profile 44
configuring 24
AppleTalk Zone Name 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IN-2
Reference Guide
uploading with XMODEM 14
Connecting to the configuration screens 4
Downloading configuration files 13
defined 13
console
configuring 9
screens, connecting to 4
Console connection problems 2
console port, using the 10
DHCP
E
Ethernet
D
D. Port 13
date and time
formats 1
setting 2
date and time formats 1
2
Ethernet Address 2
EtherTalk 3
EtherTalk Net Number 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IN-3
EtherWave, connecting 5
event history
updating with TFTP 16
ISDN 10
further reading 1
F
filter sets
modifying 23
filters
parts of 10
priority 8
using 16
18
distribution rules 11
static 10
IP addresses, distributing 9
IP Addressing 1
IP setup 6
viewing 21
firewall 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IN-4
Reference Guide
IPCP 17
IPX packet filters 10
IPX SAP Bindery Table 19
ISDN
model numbers 3
configuration 2
event history 10
loopback test 7
SPID 1
Modifying a Connection Profile 14
NAT 1
ISDN Configuration Guide 1
ISDN event cause codes 3
ISDN loopback test 7
using 2
NAT guidelines 5
K
L
LEDs 4
connecting 3
answering calls 41
connecting to Ethernet, rules 4
connecting to LocalTalk 3
distributing IP addresses 16, 9
setup 11
LocalTalk Net Number 8
loopback test 7
Loopback test status reports 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IN-5
Network problems 5
network status overview 1
Next 15
Protecting the Security Options screen 4
Q
Next Router Address 15
non-seeding 6
R
O
Output filter 1 26
P
packet
header 16
PAP
password
PCMCIA, see PC Card port
Ping 2, 3
ping test, configuring and initiating 3
Pkts Fwded 15
defined 51
deleting 56
modifying 56
once-only 55
viewing 52
Point-to-Point Protocol, see PPP options
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IN-6
Reference Guide
security
user accounts (passwords) 2
seeding 5
Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) 3
Service Profile ID, see SPID
Setting the IP trap receivers 20
static routes 11
nested 13
SNMP
SNMP agent 17
downloading configuration files 17
updating firmware 16
TFTP, transferring files 15
Thick and Thin Ethernet 8
TID, defined 1
SNMP Setup screen 18
SNMP traps 19
Socket 2
soft seeding 6
Speech 30
SPID
timeout for idle calls 30
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) 15
correct format 2
defined 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IN-7
loopback test 7
WAN statistics 5
Trusted subnet 27
uploading configuration files 14
U
with TFTP 16
user accounts 2
Using filter sets 8
V
Viewing and modifying packet filters 11
Viewing and modifying SAP filter sets 18
Viewing IP trap receivers 21
Viewing scheduled connections 52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies
Farallon warrants to you, the end user, that the Netopia™ ISDN
Router (the “Product”) will be free from defects in materials and
workmanship under normal use for a period of one (1) year from
date of purchase. Farallon’s entire liability and your sole remedy
under this warranty during the warranty period is that Farallon shall,
at its option, either repair the Product or refund the original
purchase price of the Product.
In order to make a claim under this warranty you must comply with
the following procedure:
1. Contact Farallon Customer Service within the warranty period to
obtain a Return Materials Authorization (“RMA”) number.
2. Return the defective Product and proof of purchase, shipping
prepaid, to Farallon with the RMA number prominently displayed
on the outside of the package.
If you are located outside of the United States or Canada, please
contact your dealer in order to arrange for warranty service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE MADE BY FARALLON ALONE, AND
THEY ARE THE ONLY WARRANTIES MADE BY ANYONE REGARDING
THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT. FARALLON AND ITS LICENSOR(S) MAKE
NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
REGARDING THE ENCLOSED PRODUCT. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED ABOVE, FARALLON AND ITS LICENSOR(S) DO
NOT WARRANT, GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION
REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE
PRODUCT IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY,
RELIABILITY, CURRENTNESS, OR OTHERWISE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT IS
ASSUMED BY YOU. THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IS
NOT PERMITTED BY SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS, SO THE
ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT CASE, ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO NINETY (90)
DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY OF THE PRODUCT. THERE MAY
BE OTHER RIGHTS THAT YOU MAY HAVE WHICH VARY FROM
JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.
REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT ANY REMEDY SET FORTH
HEREIN FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE, IN NO EVENT WILL
FARALLON, ITS LICENSOR(S) AND THE DIRECTORS, OFFICERS,
EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS OF ANY OF THEM BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES
(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, AND
THE LIKE) ARISING OUT THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCT EVEN IF FARALLON OR ITS LICENSOR(S) HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUSE SOME
STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
FARALLON AND ITS LICENSOR(S) LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ACTUAL
DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, AND REGARDLESS OF
THE FORM OF THE ACTION (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT
[INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE], PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE),
WILL BE LIMITED TO $50.
v.697
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
